VABIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


VAKIED    OCCUPATIONS 


IN 


WEAVING 


BY 


LOUISA    WALKEE 

HEAD  MISTKESS  OP  FLEET  ROAD  BOARD  SCHOOL,  HAMPSTEAD 
(INFANTS'  DEPARTMENT) 


MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  LIMITED 

NEW  YORK:    THE  MACMILLAN  COMPANY 
1901 

All  rights  reserved 


First  Edition  1895.     Reprinted  1901. 


THIS   BOOK 

IS  RESPECTFULLY  DEDICATED 
(BY  KIND  PERMISSION) 

TO    THE 

HON.    EDWARD    LYULPH    STANLEY, 

MEMBER   OF   THE   LONDON   SCHOOL    BOARD 

AND 

MANAGER   OF   THE   FLEET   ROAD    BOARD    SCHOOLS, 
HAMPSTEAD. 

At  whose  suggestion  the  work  has  been  compiled,  and 
whose  kind  interest  in,  and  appreciation  of,  the  Author's 
varied   occupations   have  been   a  source   of  much    en- 
couragement to  her  for  many  years. 


359607 


PEEFACE 

THE  present  time  being  an  age  of  "  Varied  Occupations," 
or,  to  speak  more  correctly,  a  time  for  introducing  suitable 
occupations  and  usefulness  into  our  schools,  this  book  is 
written  in  the  hope  that  it  may  be  of  service  to  teachers 
about  to  choose  suitable  occupations.  The  work  described 
has  been  systematically  taught  in  my  own  school  for  the 
past  twenty  years. 

From  the  time  that  I  received  the  first  elements  of  Froe- 
belian  principles  at  the  Home  and  Colonial  Training  College 
until  the  present,  it  has  been  my  aim  to  use  the  Froebel 
gifts  as  the  basis  of  all  teaching,  and  when  possible  to  apply 
the  same  excellent  methods  to  other  work  of  every-day 
usefulness. 

Froebel  inculcated  the  broad  and  grand  principles  of 
the  education  and  development  of  a  child's  faculties  in  the 
treatment  of  his  gifts,  but  he  never  intended  that  the 
work  should  stop  there  ;  he  left  it  for  future  generations 
to  further  develop  and  perfect  his  plans. 

Kindergarten  teaching  as  it  often  is  taught  is  too 
mechanical  and  narrow  in  its  treatment,  and  allows  little 
scope  for  inventive  minds. 


Vlil  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Many  of  the  articles  illustrated  in  this  book  may  not 
be  constructed  on  an  .  orthodox  plan,  but  the  ways  and 
means  employed  have  been  adapted  to  meet  the  exigencies 
of  each  case  and  simplify  matters  for  little  workers. 

The  illustrations  are  from  actual  work  produced  in  the 
school.  The  entire  weaving  was  done  by  infants  of  five 
to  seven  years  of  age,  and  the  material  was  afterwards 
manipulated  into  the  useful  articles  by  the  teachers. 

In  schools  for  older  children  the  entire  work  could  be 
accomplished  by  the  children  themselves. 

System  and  method  are  two  essentials  for  gaining  good 
results  in  varied  occupations.  The  materials  must  be 
properly  prepared  and  the  teacher  be  well  acquainted  with 
her  subject,  so  as  to  be  capable  of  helping  her  pupils  in 
their  difficulties  and  of  advising  how  to  overcome  them. 

Pupil-teachers,  candidates,  and  apt  pupils  might  well  be 
employed  at  the  preparation  at  a  stated  time  each  week, 
and  the  training  would  be  excellent  for  them  hereafter. 

As  finished  pieces  are  obtained  from  the  children  they 
should  at  once  be  applied  to  the  making  of  something 
useful,  to  encourage  the  little  ones  on  to  more  careful  and 
skilful  work.  The  pride  and  satisfaction  of  a  little  child's 
face  at  seeing  its  work  so  applied  will  amply  repay  any 
teacher  for  her  trouble,  and  will  also  repay  her  monetarily, 
for  these  pretty  articles  are  readily  bought  by  the  parents 
in  remembrance  of  their  children's  cleverness. 

I  would  advise  all  infant  teachers  to  "  make  up  "  as 
they  go  along.  The  work  then  becomes  easy,  and  the 
little  things  soon  accumulate  and  can  be  proudly  shown 


PREFACE  IX 

throughout  the  year.  If  left  to  the  Examination  the 
teacher  becomes  worried  with  other  trifles  and  looks  upon 
such  work  as  a  burden.  I  can  only  assure  such  an  one 
that  plenty  of  this  kind  of  work  makes  the  school  attractive, 
and  sharpens  the  children's  intelligence  as  much  as  any 
other  subject  taught. 

In  this  large  school  the  classes  are  amalgamated  for 
subjects  such  as  Scripture,  Tonic  Sol-Fa,  repetition,  etc.,  when 
teachers  in  turn,  with  the  help  of  a  candidate,  prepare  their 
work,  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that,  in  the  future,  extra  can- 
didates will  be  allowed  in  schools  for  this  preparation. 
The  girls  would  be  able  to  work  in  the  class-room,  listen 
to  the  teaching  going  on,  and  at  the  same  time  be  "pre- 
paring" or  "making  up,"  much  to  their  own  benefit,  and 
to  the  intense  satisfaction  of  the  children. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

MAT-PLAITING          .    '  „_.'    ...    „...,.  .  .  .......      1 

EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  or  OCCUPATION     .        .  '    .  .  .  9 

PATTERNS        .        .        .        ...        .'  .  .  13 

UTILITY  OF  MATS    .         ...        ...  .  .  .  19 

USEFUL  APPLICATION  OF  THE  MATS       .        .  .  .  .  33 

OPEN  WEAVING       .        .        ...        .  .  .  .  37 

DIAGONAL  WEAVING       .        .        .        .        ....  40 

FREE  WEAVING       ...       ...        .  .  .  .  44 

FANCY  WEAVING .  ...  50 

PAPER-PLAITING      ...        .        .        .        .  .  .  .  53 

PAPER-FOLDING  AND  WEAVING       .        ,        .  .  58 

WEAVING  IN  RIBBON       .        .        .        .        .  .  .  63 

STRING  WEAVING    ...        .        .        .  .  .  .  68 

DIAGONAL  WEAVING        .        .        *        ...  .  .  .  77 

FRAME  WEAVING    .         .         .        ....  .  '  .  83 

STRING  WEAVING  ON  CANE    .        .        .        .  .  .  .  102 

WEAVING  WITH  MACRAME  TWINE          .        .  .  .  .  106 

SINGLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING       .        .        .  .   »  .  .  Ill 

DOUBLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING      .        .        .  ....  .  118 

CHAIR-CANING  .  121 


xn  VARIED  OCCUPA  T2ONS  IN  WEA  V1NG 

PAGE 

SPLIT  STRAW  WEAVING           .  .  .  ...        .  .       126 

STRAW  WORK          .        .        .  .  .  ...  .       159 

STRAW  PLAIT  WEAVING          .  .  .  .        ...       159 

STRAW  PLAIT  WORK .162 

CANE  WEAVING      .        .        .  ,  170 

HORIZONTAL  CANE  WEAVING  .  .  •  ,        .        .  .       172 

BASKET  WEAVING   -.        ,       v  -.-.»  .-;.,    .  .  •      .        .  .       174 

FLAT  CIRCULAR  WEAVING       .  .  .  .        ,        .  .186 

UPRIGHT  CIRCULAR  WEAVING  .  .  .        .  •      .  198 

COMBINED  CANE  WEAVING     .  .  207 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

FIG.  PAGE 

1.  Mat  I.     '.        ".       •  .          .          .          .          .         '.''.  .    -,       1 

2.  Mat  I.  showing  Broad  Strips  raised       '    .         ...  .  3 

3.  Mat  I.  woven  with  Broad  and  Narrow  Strips    .         .  .  3 

4.  Mat  I.           ,,            ,,         Strips        .         .         .         .-  .  3 

5.  Cotton  Box  made  of  Eight  Mats  (Mat  I.)  .        .        •.'  .     •       4 

6.  Mat  II.  with  Needle  inserted    .         .         .   "     .-      .  .  6 

7.  Blotting  Book  made  of  Four  Mats  (Mat  II.)      .         .  .  7 

8.  Pin  Tray  made  of  Two  Mats  (Mat  II.)      ....  8 

9.  Mat  III.  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .'*'.''  .  10 

10.  Steel  Plaiting  Needle      -.         ;.'-•'.         .         .         .  .  10 

11.  Closed  Envelope       .         .         .         .  "      .        '.        -.:.  .  11 

12.  Open           ,,              .         .       -  ,      '  .       •-.»        .;        .  .  12 

13.  Weaving  Patterns  1,  2,  3,  Stage  II.           .         .         .  .  14 

14.  „                 4,  5,  6           .         v  ...         .         .  .  15 

15.  „                 7,  8      .......         i;»  .  16 

16.  „                 9           .    .    .       •  .      .., '     '..       .  .  17 

17.  Toilet  Tidy      .....         .         .       V    .    .  .  21 

18.  Flower  Vase '.'V.        '.  '  .  22 

19.  Diagram  of  Flower  Vase    .         .         .         .    :     .         i  .'  22 

20.  Hexagonal  Flower-pot  Cover     .         .         .         .  :       .  .  23 

21.  Fourfold  Fire-screen          .      -.    ••    .         .         .  -    .  ,  .  .  24 

22.  Bellows  Toilet  Tidy           .         .       -.         .>     .         ,  .  .26 

23.  24.  Diagrams  for  Toilet  Tidy    .        ..-'        .  .    r;       -  ^  '  '  .  27 

25.  Stage  III.,  Weaving  Patterns  1,  2,  3         .         .         .  .  28 

26.  4,  5    .        '..       .      .V  .  29 


xiv  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

FIG.  PAGE 

27.  Stage  III.,  Weaving  Patterns,  6,  7,  8       .         .         .         .  30 

28.  „                        „                  9,  10,  11    .         ;        .         .  31 

29.  ,,                         „                 12,  13,  14    .         .         .         .  32 

30.  Slipper  Pocket 34 

31.  Serviette  Ring 34 

32.  Card  Basket 35 

33.  Vase  for  Pampas-grass  or  Umbrellas           ....  36 

34.  Mat  cut  for  Open  Weaving 39 

35.  Mat  crossed            ,,                    40 

36.  First  Diagonal  Woven  Mat        .         .         .         .         .         .  41 

37.  Finished  Diagonal       ,,               ......  42 

38.  Handkerchief  Sachet  in  Diagonal  Weaving        ...  43 

39.  Strips  placed  for  Free  Weaving          .                   ...  44 

40.  Working  Diagrams  of  Free  Weaving          ....  46 

41.  42.  Letters  made  in  Free  Weaving,  H,  L,  F,  0,  S     .         .  47 

43.  Woven  Piece  for  Hanging  Bag           .....  48 

44.  Hanging  Bag  in  Free  Weaving          .....  49 

45.  Handkerchief  Sachet  in  Free  Weaving       ....  50 

46.  Open  Papers  in  Fancy  Weaving 51 

47.  Fancy  Weaving,  Angles  turned  down         ....  52 

48.  ,,                     ,,        interlaced    .         .         .         .         .  52 

49.  ,,                 Newspaper  Rack     .                  .         .         .  52 

50.  Paper  Plait  of  Three  Strips 54 

51.  Diagrams  1,  2,  3,  4,  for  Vandyke  Plait     ....  55 

f  Right  side  of  Vandyke  Plait          .       >'       .         .         .  56 

I  Wrong          „             „         ......         .         .         .  56 

53.  Newspaper  Bag       ........         .         .         .  57 

54.  Paper  Plaited  Lamp  Mat        . 58 

55.  ,,            Toilet  Tidy 61 

56.  Diagram  of  Envelope  Pocket     .         .                  .         .         .  62 

57.  Slate  Pegged  for  Ribbon  Weaving     .....  63 

58.  Ribbon  Plaited  Pin-cushion 64 

59.  „               Handkerchief  Sachet         ....  65 

60.  Folded  Satin  Sofa  Cushion 67 

61.  Slate  Frame  wound  for  String  Weaving    ....  70 

62.  Plait  of  String 71 


IL  L  US  TRA  T1ONS  x  v 

FIG.  PAGE 

63.  String  Woven  Toilet  Tidy         .         .         .         .    "     .':  '  v  71 

64.  Buttonhole  Looping  on  Ruler    .         .         ...  .  .  72 

65.  Round  String  Mat .  4  73 

66.  Fringe  complete        .         .         .                  .         .  .  .  73 

67.  Weaving  Frame        .         .      '•". •'.-•"  ,    r    .         .      ...  '.  74 

68.  String  Handbag        .         .         ,         .'        .         ,  :       .  '  '.  76 

69.  Diagonal  String  Weaving,  Diagram  1        ;         .  .  ;  78 

70.  „                     „                  „         2      '  *  .;•••.-  >.'  .  79 

71.  „                    „                 „        3      %        .  .  .  80 

72.  „                     ,,                  „         4        .     "    .-      -  .  '  .  81 

73.  ,,                     ,,             Doll's  Bedstead    •    .  .  82 

74.  Frame  Weaving,  "Star"           .^  -     .    ;     .      -  ,  .    -.-  .  83 

75.  ,,                "Sun"  .        .;  -    ..'       ,    -    .  .    •  .  84 

76.  ,,                 "Circular"    .         .         .       V  •  '  .  '  .  84 

77.  ,,                  "Helper"       .         .         .  .-      .  .  -  .  85 

78.  Sketch  for  Blackboard,  Star  Shape    .         .         .  .  .  85 

79.  Windings  of  Sun  Shape    .         .     -    .    •      .•'.  .'  .  86 

80.  Star  Picture  Frame           .                 :  .      .         .  .  .  87 

81.  Glass  fixed  in  position      .         .         .         .         .  ..  .  88 

82.  Brass-headed  Nail         •    .         .    t     .    •     .        ^  .•  .  -88 

83.  Star  Shape,  Pattern  2,  beginning      .         ..        .  .  '.  89 

84.  „                „        3,          „           '/       .       '..  .  .  »1 

85.  ,,             Card  Basket  .         .         .         .         .  .     "  .  92 

86.  ,,            Key  Rack      .    x    .         .         .    ;     .   •      .  .  93 

87.  ,,             Pattern  4,  beginning      ..;.>.«         .  .  94 

88.  „                   ,,5          „              .         .         .    '     .  .  96 

89.  ,,                  ,,       Picture  Frame          ...  .  -.  97 

90.  Sun  Shape,  Pattern  1        .        .         .1        .         .  .  .  98 

91.  Finished  Plaque,  Circular  Shape       ,         »         .      '    .  .  100 

92.  Working  Diagram  of  Plaque     .         .         .'        .  .  ,  101 

93.  Foundation  Diagram  for  Circular  String  Mat    .  .  .  •  103 

94.  Border  for  Doll's  Table     .         .         .         .         .       "  .  .  104 

95.  Doll's  Table  in  String       ....         .         .  .  .  104 

96.  Doll's  Chair        ,,                       .     •   .         .         ..  .  105 

97.  Arrangement  of  Foundation  for  Macrame' Twine  Mat  .  107 

98.  Pin-cushion      .-..-.         .  109 


xvi  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

FIG.  PAGE 

99.   Letter  Rack  of  String  Mais 110 

100.  Slate  drilled  for  Chair-caning 113 

101.  Slate  crossed  in  Single  Strand  Chair-caning      .         .         .115 

102.  Slate  diagonally  crossed  in  Single  Strand  Chair-caning      .  115 

103.  Finished  Slate  in  Single  Strand  Chair-caning    .         .         .  116 

104.  Corner  of  Slate  showing   horizontal  crossing  of  Double 

Strand  Chair-caning      .......  119 

105.  Diagonal  String  Weaving  (single)     ...         .         .         .  120 

106.  ,,  ,,  (double)     .         .         .         .         .120 

107.  Chair  Seat  Caning— First  Crossing 123 

108.  ,,                ,,         Second      ,,                  ...         .         .  124 

109.  „                ,,         Diagonal,,         ,    v  .         .         .         .  125 

110.  ,,                ,,         Beading     .         ...        '.. '      ••  126 

111.  Split  Straw  Clip    .'  .     .   ..'     .     .    .       ;'.         .         .         .  131 

112.  ,,           Slipper  Pocket        .        ...         .         ,        .  133 

113.  Diagram  of  Slipper  Pocket        v         .         »        i        .         •  134 

114.  Split  Straw  Dinner  Mat    .      .    .     ,    ...-  ,*.....         .  135 

115.  How  to  draw  the  Ellipse  .         .                 .        .        ..        .  136 

116.  Split  Straw  Blotter           .  ,      .         .  ^ ,  .,       *        ...  138 

117.  „          Photo  Frame          .        '.         .         .         .         .  141 

118.  Diagram  of            „                 ,-,::^:      .         .         .     .. -^       .  142 

119.  Split  Straw  Circular  Pocket      .         .         .         .         .         .  143 

120.  Diagram  of              ,,                  .         ......  144 

121.  Split  Straw  Boat  Cotton  Basket        .         ,         .         .         .  145 

122.  Diagram  of            ,,               „          .  .-.       .. .'     „         .     ;    .  146 

123.  Split  Straw  Octagonal  Needle-book  .         .         .         .         .  147 

124.  Heart  Pin-cushion     .       ,,,.        .    ......       .         .         .         .  148 

125.  Split  Straw  Toilet  Tidy    .         .         .         .         .         .         .  149 

126.  Diagram  of           „             .'   ,    .         .         .         ...         .  150 

127.  Split  Straw  Hand-screen  .         .         .         .         .         .151 

128.  Patterns  of  Fans 152 

129.  Split  Straw  Flower 153 

130.  Diagram  of  Petal,  No.  1 154 

131.  ,,             „          No.  2 154 

132.  ,,             „          No.  3 155 

133.  Petals  mounted,     No.  4 155 


ILL  USTRA  TIONS 

xvii 

FIG. 

PAGE 

134.   Simple  Flowers         .--..•     .    •     .    •    \   ' 

-•'.£••  -:-'   .    ise 

135.   Fancy  Table  and  Stands  .         ... 

-V;':;    .   ;     .       157 

136.  Straw  Plait  Hand  Basket          .    •     .'•••''•'••.  -'" 

':\''  :''l"-.     .       161 

137.             „          Wall  Pocket            .      -  .'        •  ' 

%  '•  •'•''.'  V-"  .        164 

138.             „         Handbag        .         . 

.    •     .         .       166 

139.  Foundation  of  Handbag            .    •     .    •     . 

.        167 

140.   Glove  Box  (Straw  Plait)   .         .    •     .         . 

.   •      ..         .       169 

141.  First  Winding  of  Handkerchief  Box 

.  '  '     .         .       169 

142.  Second          / 

'  ••'  •            170 

143.   Cane  Double  Fern  Pocket          .         ... 

.       175 

144.  Foundation  of  Four  Strands 

.   •     .       179 

145.             „             Eight      „      No.  1     . 

179 

146.             „                  „          „      No.  2     . 

.        .       180 

147.             „                  „          „      No.  3     .         . 

-./      .    '     .       181 

148.             „                 „          „      No.  4     . 

.181 

149.  Cane  Border,  No.  1           .         ,    .  •    .         . 

.         .'        .       182 

150.             „            No.  2           .         .... 

.         .         .       183 

151.             ,,            No.  3           .         .         .         . 

.         .         .       183 

152.'            „            No.  4           .         . 

.184 

153.             „            No.  5           .         ... 

184 

154.             „            No.  6           .         .        ; 

.       184 

155.            „            No.  7           .  '  .    .' 

185 

156.  Cane  Small  Circular  Mat          .         ,        . 

.       186 

.     •    .                187 

158.  Large  Round  Mat    .         .        '.         ... 

.         .         .       190 

159.  Centre  of  Large  Round  Mat      . 

.       191 

160.  Oval  Dinner  Mat      .         .         .,.-." 

.         .         .       192 

161.  Foundation  of  Dinner  Mat 

.         .         .       193 

162.  Centre  of  Dinner  Mat       ;        . 

...         .       194 

163.  Shell  Fire-screen 

.  -      .       196 

164.  Foundation  Centre  for  Shell      .         . 

..197 

165.  Small  Wheelbarrow           .         .         . 

.         .         .       201 

166.  Mail  Cart 

.       203 

167.  Seat  of  Mail  Cart      .         .         ... 

...       204 

168.   Lady's  Sailor-hat  Work-basket 

.       206 

169.  Cotton  Basket 

208 

xvni  VARIED  OCCUPA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VING 

FIG.  PAGE 

170.  Small  Card-basket    .         .  .....         .  •"     V  .  211 

171.  Doll's  Sailor-hat  Fern- stand  .         .         ...         .  .  212 

172.  Turned-itp  Doll's  Hat       .  .         ",                  ,         .  .  .  213 

173.  Hamper  or  Tumbler  Case  .       ;.         .         .         .  .  215 

174.  Art  Pot    .         .         .         .  .         .        -.  ^   .         ,  .  216 

175.  Oval  Hand-basket    .         .  .         .        .,;:..  .  218 

176.  Fern-stand  for  Table         .  .         -.'        .         ,       ',  .  220 

177.  Fern  Vase  with  Stand       ,  ,        ..         .         .         .  .  222 

178.  Hanging  Vase  for  Flowers  .         .                 ,.         .  .  223 


MAT-PLAITING 


STAGE  I. 

MAT-PLAITING  consists  of  interlacing-  strips  of  paper  in 
either  the  same  or  different  colours.  The  introduction  of 
coloured  strips  renders  the  occupation  more  effective  and 
interesting,  and  greatly  adds  to  the  beauty  of  the  work. 

The  occupation  is  interesting  and  instructive,  and 
teaches  chiefly  colour,  number,  and  the  combination  of 
numbers,  and  also  the  simple 
multiplication  and  division  of 
the  same  in  a  pleasant  way. 

The  hand  and  eye  are  both 
trained  in  accuracy,  form, 
and  design,  and  the  occupa- 
tion forms  the  basis  for  more 
advanced  work  in  weaving. 

The  instruction  may  be 
graduated  and  divided  into 
three  stages. 

Stage  I.  may  be  taken  by 
the  lower  infants  upon  leaving  FIG.  i. 

the  babies'  room.  Children  at  this  early  stage  have  to 
acquire  new  ideas  and  an  enlarged  vocabulary,  therefore 
during  the  teaching  of  this  stage  it  is  essential  to  describe 


OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

and  speak  of  everything  in  correct  terms.  Stage  I.  consists 
of  two  mats,  named  Mats  I.  and  II.  They  are  stiff  mats, 
nearly  square,  and  are  interlaced  by  corresponding  strips  of 
cardboard.  Both  mats  and  strips  are  sold  in  packets  at  all 
Kindergarten  depots.  Mat  I.  consists  of  four  strips,  two 
broad  and  two  narrow. 


MAT  No.  I. 

Plan  Of  Lesson. — Each  child  should  be  furnished  with 
a  blue  mat,  No.  L,  and  four  loose  strips,  two  of  which 
should  be  wide  and  two  narrow.  The  mat  is  laid  flat  on 
the  desk  before  the  child,  with  the  strips  running  vertically, 
and  then  examined.  Count  each  corner,  each  side,  and 
each  strip.  Look  at  the  strips.  Are  they  alike  1  How  do 
they  differ  1  The  teacher  might  measure  the  width  of  the 
strips,  and  lead  children  to  see  they  are  not  alike,  and 
therefore  must  have  different  names.  Give  the  new  words 
"broad"  and  "narrow."  Lift  up  the  two  broad  strips,  lift 
up  the  two  narrow.  How  many  will  two  broad  and  two 
narrow  strips  make*?  What  colour  is  the  mat1?  Name 
other  things  of  a  blue  colour,  etc. 

Children  to  compare  the  strips  of  the  mat  with  those 
given  them  for  weaving.  Ask  them  to  hold  up  one  strip. 
Now  hold  up  one  from  mat.  They  cannot.  Lead  them  to 
see  that  the  mat  strips  are  fastened,  and  are  held  tight  in 
the  mat,  and  therefore  are  called  tight  strips.  Those  given 
for  weaving  can  be  taken  up  one  by  one,  and  are  called  loose. 
Exercise  children  in  the  new  words,  thus,  touch  a  tight 
strip,  touch  a  loose  strip,  lift  up  a  broad  tight  strip,  hold  up 
a  narrow  loose  strip,  etc. 

Weaving. — Children  to  take  a  broad  loose  strip  in  the 


MAT- PLAITING 


right  hand.     Upon  the  left  hand  raise  the  two  broad  tight 
strips. 


Fia.  2. 


Compare  these  strips  to  wide  arches,  talk  about  bridges, 
tunnels,   etc.,  and   children   to  tell   how  we   go   through 


FIG.  3,— Mat  woven  with  broad  and 
narrow  strips. 


Fia.  4. — Mat  woven  with  broad  strips. 


tunnels.     The  loose  strip  is  to  represent  the   train,   and 
must  be  passed  under  the  arches  and  the  left  hand  with- 


4  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING        • 

drawn.  Next  lift  up  the  two  narrow  strips  on  left  hand, 
and  thread  underneath  a  narrow  loose  strip.  Two  more 
strips  done  in  the  same  way  complete  the  mat.  Keep  the 
ends  of  the  loose  strips  on  the  working  side,  which  is  the 


wrong  side. 

Cotton   Box. 
cotton  boxes. 


—Eight   of   these    mats   make  very  useful 
Cut  all  the  ends  even  and   about  half  an 


inch  from  the  edge  of  mat.     Paste  two  together  (the  ends 
inside)  for  the  cover,  and  two  for  the  bottom. 

Take  the  other  four  and  crease  in  half  and  paste,  two  the 
long  way  of  mat  and  two  the  short.  Do  the  pasting  all  at 
one  time,  and  place  under  a  weight  to  dry.  The  border  of 
short  sides  will  need  a  little  cutting  to  fit  with  long  sides. 
The  older  children  can  prick  holes  at  the  edges,  and  sew 
together,  as  in  Fig.  5.  The  cover  is  sewn  all  round  to 
match  the  lower  edges,  and  then  secured  by  passing  a 


MAT-PLAITING  5 

ribbon  through  two  punched  holes  in  the  box  and  cover, 
and  tying  in  a  smart  boAv  on  the  top  of  box. 

Two  ends  of  ribbon  attached  to  lid  and  front  complete  a 
very  useful  article. 

MAT  No.  II. 

Materials. — 1.  Thin  cardboard  mats  consisting  of  six 
tight  strips. 

2.  White  or  coloured  loose  cardboard  strips  of  \  inch 
width. 

Method. — Mat  II.  presents  to  the  children  a  new 
difficulty,  and  therefore  the  first  step  will  be  to  examine 
carefully  the  mat,  to  note  the  colour,  shape,  sides,  corners, 
etc.,  and  compare  it  with  Mat  I.  The  two  mats  are  similar 
in  every  respect,  except  in  the  number  and  size  of  the 
strips.  Mat-I.  has  two  broad  and  two  narrow  strips  dealing 
with  the  number  four,  and  Mat  II.  has  six  strips,  all  of  the 
same  width.  The  words  "broad"  and  "narrow"  cannot 
now  be  applied  to  the  weaving,  but  the  terms  "up"  and 
"  down  "  are  substituted  instead.  This  is  puzzling  to  young 
children  at  first,  and  therefore  numerous  exercises  must  be 
given  of  "lifting  up"  one  strip,  such  as  "Lift  up  No.  2 
strip,"  "Lift  up  No.  4,"  and  No.  6,  and  so  on.  When  the 
children  fully  understand  the  idea  of  "  lifting  up  "  one  strip, 
then  the  weaving  can  be  commenced  and  alternated  in  the 
succeeding  rows.  This  step  is  the  foundation  of  all  weav- 
ing, and  when  once  thoroughly  understood  by  the  children 
the  occupation  may  be  varied  by  weaving  in  materials  and 
cane  and  straw,  etc. 

No  needles  are  used  at  this  stage,  the  cardboard  mat  and 
strips  being  sufficiently  firm  to  use  without. 

The  teacher  should  prepare  a  similar  mat  on  a  larger 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


scale,  and  fix  to  the  blackboard.  She  must  then  "lift  up" 
her  strips  with  a  lath,  and  weave  one  strip  up  and  one  strip 
down  with  the  children. 

Let  the  strips  be  counted  and  named  as  strips  1,2,  3,  4, 
5,  6.  For  first  row  "lift  up"  Nos.  1,  3,  and  5.  When  the 
children  have  completed  the  first  row,  let  them  count  the 
strips  "  lifted  up  "  (3)  and  the  strips  put  down  (3).  Com- 
pare the  weaving  to  square  windows — three  white  and  three 
blue — making  six  in  all.  Simple  arithmetical  problems 


FIG.  6. 

may  now  be  asked,  and  as  each  succeeding  row  is  woven, 
the  questions  put  should  increase  in  difficulty.  The  children 
will  soon  discern  a  mistake  in  the  weaving,  and  correct 
their  own  inaccuracies. 

The  weaving  of  "one  "  is  the  only  pattern  taught  in  this 
mat,  but  variety  may  be  obtained  in  using  strips  of  different 
colours  and  of  different  widths. 

This  mat  may  be  utilised  as  a  great  teaching  aid  to 
number,  form,  and  colour  in  a  pleasant  way. 

Each   child's   name  should  be  lightly  pencilled   on  his 


MAT-PLAITING  7 

mat,  and  when  finished  it  will  be  a  source  of  pleasure  to 
take  home  as  a  specimen  of  his  own  work. 

A  few  of  the  best  mats  might  be  made  into  useful 
articles  with  very  little  trouble. 

Blotting  Book — Take  four  finished  mats.  Cut  the  loose 
strips  even,  about  half  an  inch  from  the  edge.  With 
preserved  paste  or  starch,  evenly  spread  over  one  mat, 


FIG.  7.— Blotting  Book. 

stick  each  two  exactly  together,  placing  the  loose  strips 
inside.  A  weight  must  be  placed  on  the  top,  and  the  mats 
left  to  dry  until  perfectly  smooth  and  flat.  The  children 
in  the  sewing  class  can  improve  the  border  by  pricking 
holes  and  working  over  the  edges  with  a  cross  or  button- 
hole stitch. 

Two  holes  are  next  punched  in  the  border  of  mats,  and 
three  sheets  of  pink  or  white  blotting-paper  are  inserted 


8  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

and  a  ribbon  threaded  through  the  whole,  and  tied  in  two 
bows  at  the  back. 

These  books  are  readily  sold  for  a  few  pence  to  cover 
cost  of  ribbon  and  blotting-paper. 

A  Needle-look  may  be  made  of  two  mats  pasted  together 
in  the  same  manner,  and  then  folded  in  half  whilst  the 
paste  is  damp  and  placed  under  a  weight. 

Ornament  the  edges  with  a  cross  or  button-hole  stitch, 
and  sew  inside  three  pieces  of  red  flannel  not  quite  the 
size  of  the  mat.  Snip  the  edges  of  the  flannel  and  fasten 
on  short  ribbons  to  tie  the  covers  together  in  front,  and  also 


FIG.  8.— Pin  Tray. 

pass  a  ribbon  inside  the  flannel  strips,  and  tie  on  the  out- 
side at  the  back. 

Pin  Tray. — Take  two  mats  and  paste  together  as  before 
described.  Let  the  mats  remain  under  a  weight  for  two 
minutes,  until  the  paste  has  adhered  and  the  mats  are 
damp  and  pliable.  Press  up  the  border  all  round,  and 
pinch  the  corners  outwards,  holding  them  in  position  for  a 
few  moments.  A  string  tied  across  the  length  and  width 
will  hold  the  border  in  position  till  the  tray  is  dry. 

Square  Floiver-pot  Cover. — Eight  mats  pasted  together  will 
make  a  very  good  flower-pot  cover.  The  shape  may  be 


EDUCATIONAL    VALUE  OF  OCCUPATION  9 

square,  using  the  mats  as  they  are,  or  each  mat  could  be 
narrowed  by  cutting  the  border  at  the  base.  Fasten  the 
mats  together  with  brass-headed  paper  fasteners.  If  a 
circular  shape  is  needed,  the  mats  must  be  tied  in  this 
form  when  damp,  as  they  cannot  be  made  circular  after, 
when  dry.  To  do  this,  paste  the  mats  together  and  tie  them 
'round  a  bottle  or  any  round  object  until  dry.  Cut  the 
border  from  top  corner  and  narrow  it  towards  the  bottom. 
Fasten  the  mats  together  with  the  brass  knob  paper  fasteners. 
These  fasteners  are  quite  an  ornamentation,  and  make  a  very 
neat  and  compact  way  of  fastening.  Toilet  tidies,  letter 
racks,  card  baskets,  and  other  articles  are  easily  made  in  the 
same  way. 

EDUCATIONAL   VALUE   OF   OCCUPATION 

STAGE  II. 

(a)  It  may  be  utilised  to  teach  the  addition  and  multi- 
plication of  numbers. 

(b)  It  is  good  for  the  cultivation  of  the  imitative  and 
inventive  faculties,  and  affords  scope  for  practical  ingenuity 
in  designing  new  patterns. 

(c)  It  teaches  regularity  and   symmetry,   thus  training 
both  hand  and  eye  to  correctness. 

(d)  It  forms  an  educational  yet  pleasant  and  interesting 
occupation  for  children. 

(e)  It  teaches  colour,  and  cultivates  a  taste  for  combining 
the  same. 

Materials  required  for  each  Child.— l.  A  brown 
paper  envelope  to  contain  materials. 

2.  A  stiff  cardboard  mat,  No.  III.,  and  thin  correspond- 
ing mat,  No.  IV. 


10 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


3.  Cardboard  and  paper  strips  \  inch  in  width. 

4.  Steel  plaiting  needle. 

Method  employed. — The  mats  used  in  Stage  I.  were 
stiff,  and  woven  with  stiff  strips  without  needles.  The 
number  "one"  formed  the  basis  of  that  stage,  and  the 

children  were  taught  the  simple 
rule  of  reversing  the  weaving 
every  alternate  row. 

Stage  II.  introduces  a  mat 
of  greater  difficulty,  and  in- 
volves the  use  of  a  plaiting 
needle. 

The  Mat.— Mat  III.  is  an 
oblong  cardboard  mat,  consist- 
ing of  fifteen  tight  strips,  and 
is  termed  the  teaching  or  class 
mat,  because  it  is  used  chiefly 
for  preliminary  practice  in  teach- 
ing a  pattern,  which  is  afterwards  reproduced  by  the  child 
upon  the  corresponding  thin  Mat  IV. 

The  Needle. — Steel  needles  with  a  new  spring  action  are 
the  best.  The  globular  end  is  pressed  and  the  clips  open, 
ready  to  receive  the  weaving  strip.  Each  child  should 


FIG.  9.-Mat  III 


FIG.  10.— Steel  Plaiting  Needle. 

practise  threading  the  needle.  It  might  form  a  preliminary 
exercise  to  the  weaving  and  a  short  drill  be  arranged  for  the 
exercise — e.g. 

Drill. — (1)  Take  needles  in  left  hand  and  hold  the  spring 
horizontally  between  finger  and  thumb. 

(2)  Take  strip  in  right  hand. 


EDUCATIONAL   VALUE  OF  OCCUPATION  11 

(3)  Press  open  the  spring  of  needle. 

(4)  Insert  strip  in  the  clip. 

(5)  Show  needle  threaded. 

Children  must  be  taught  that  the  use  of  the  needle  is  to 
"lift  up,"  and  various  exercises  of  "lifting  up"  "one"  and 
"  two  "  strips  should  be  given  with  the  unthreaded  needle 
before  actual  weaving  is  commenced. 

When  the  children  are  proficient  in  this  exercise,  and 
thoroughly  understand  the  term  of  "lifting  up,"  then  a 
pattern  may  be  commenced. 

Each  child  should  be  provided  with  a  brown  paper 
envelope  containing  two  mats  (III.  and  IV.)  and  a  plaiting 
needle.  The  child's  name  should  be  legibly  written  on  the 
outside,  so  as  to  ensure  each  child  having  its  own  work,  and 
also  to  aid  in  quickness  of  distribution. 

Demonstration. —  The  teacher  will  require  a  weaving 
demonstration  frame,  or  she  must  prepare  a  duplicate  mat 
on  a  large  scale  for  teaching  purposes.  The  frame  consists 
of  a  wooden  border,  with  strips  of  green  braid,  and  the 
weaving  is  done  with  wooden  laths. 

A  chequered  board  and  coloured  chalks  are  necessary  to 
illustrate   the  weaving   on   black- 
board.     Method    and    order    are 
essentials   in    good    schools,    and 
therefore     before     the     children 
begin  the  intricacies  of  mat  weav- 
ing, it  is  desirable  to  train  them  in 
the  management  of  their  materials,       FlG'  1L-closed  Envelope' 
thus : — 

Mat  Drill. — 1.  Place  envelopes  on  desk,  flap  at  top. 

2.  Open  and  turn  back  top  flap. 

3.  Open  and  turn  outwards  side  flaps. 

4.  Open  and  turn  back  lower  flaps. 


12 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


5.  Take  out  mats  and  needle. 

6.  Shut  envelopes  and  place  aside. 


FIG.  12.— Open  Envelope. 

Plan  Of  Lesson.— I.  Examination  of  Mat.— Refer  to 
the  border  as  the  frame,  and  let  children  name  other  articles 
with  frames,  e.g.  slates,  pictures,  looking-glass,  etc.  Tight 
strips  to  be  counted  (fifteen).  How  many  times  can  five 
be  counted  1  How  many  times  three  ?  etc. 

II.  Threading  the  Needle. — The  children  first   learn   to 
thread  their  needles.     This'  is  a  simple  exercise,  and  will 
easily  be  accomplished.    » 

III.  The   PFeaving.—~For  a  first    lesson,  the  cardboard 
mat  No.   III.    only   should    be   used,    but   afterwards,    in 
subsequent  patterns,  it  is  best  to  make  this  the  teaching 
mat,  and  have  the  whole  class  weave  row  by  row  with  the 
teacher,  for  at  least  six  rows,  after  which  all  the  proficient 
children  should  be  allowed  to  reproduce  the  same  pattern 
upon  the  private  mat  No.  IV.,  which  corresponds  in  size  and 


PATl^ERNS  13 

strips  to  Mat  III.,  the  only  difference  being  in  the  thick- 
ness. 

The  teacher  is  thus  enabled  to  devote  her  attention  to 
the  backward  ones,  and  keep  the  whole  class  at  the  same 
stage  upon  the  teaching  mat. 

Three  or  four  different  patterns  may  be  taught  upon 
Mat  III.,  and  Mat  IV.  will  be  a  further  exercise  for  pro- 
ducing the  entire  pattern  of  each. 

As  the  weaving  proceeds,  the  pattern  should  be  illus- 
trated in  coloured  chalks  upon  the  Kindergarten  board, 
and  if  the  copy  be  retained,  it  will  form  a  good  exercise 
for  a  lesson  in  Kindergarten,  drawing,  and  shading. 

The  weaving  is  easier  to  understand  when  done  on  the 
wrong  side  of  the  mat.  By  so  doing,  the  right  side  of  the 
mat  is  placed  downwards  on  the  desk,  and  thus  kept  clean, 
and  the  ends  of  the  strips  being  kept  on  the  upper  side, 
the  children  have  to  deal  only  with  the  strips,  and  are  not 
puzzled  about  the  frame  or  border. 


PATTERNS 

Materials. — Brown  paper  envelope,  containing  needle 
and  Mats  III.  and  IY.  and  loose  strips. 

Mat  Drill. — Open  envelopes  with  drill  and  practise 
the  new  pattern  with  unthreaded  needles.  This  course 
consists  of  patterns  based  on  the  numbers  "  one "  and 
"two,"  and  the  combination  and  transference  right  and 
left  of  the  same.  Opportunity  should  be  taken  of  teaching 
arithmetic  with  these  numbers. 

As  the  alternate  rows  are  not  always  similar,  the  attention 
must  be  concentrated  upon  the  work,  and  an  inspection 
should  be  made  quickly  of  the  rows  as  they  are  woven. 


H  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

The  following  illustrations  are  good  patterns  for  this 
course,  and  give  an  idea  how  Mat  III.  should  be  used  for 
teaching  the  different  patterns.  Each  pattern  illustrates 
the  representation  which  should  appear  on  the  chequered 
blackboard. 


FIG.  13.— Patterns  1,  2,  3. 


PATTERNS  1,  2,  3 

No.  1 

First  Eow. — 1  down,  1  up.      ]  The  second  row  is  the  re  verse 
Second  How. — 1  up,  1  down,    j  of  the  first. 


PATTERNS 


First  Row.— 2 
Second  Row 


'. — 2  up,  2  down.       ) 
w. — 2  down,  2  up.    j 


No.  2 

The  second  row  is  the  reverse 
of  the  first. 

No.  3 

First  Row. — 1  down,  2  up.      )  Combination    of    1    and    2. 
Second  Row. — 1  up,  2  down,   j    Second  line  reverse  of  first. 


4. 


Pio.  14.— Patterns  4,  5,  6. 

PATTERNS  4,  5,  6 

No.  4 

First  Row. — 2  down,  2  up. 
Second  Row. — 1  up,  2  down,  2  up. 
Third  Row.—?,  up,  2  down,  2  up.         f    one  strip  to  left  for 
Fourth  Row. — 1  down,  2  up,  2  down,  j     four  rows.   Repeat. 


\  Step  pattern  to  left. 
f     Transfer      pattern 


1 6  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

No.  5 

First  Row. — 2  up,  2  down.  \ 

Second  Row. — 1  up,  2  down,  2  up.        f  Step      pattern      to 
Third  Row.— 2  down,  2  up.  |  right. 

Fourth  Row. — 1  down,  2  up,  2  down,  j 

No.  6 

Patterns  4  and  5  combined.     Step  patterns  to  right  and 
left. 


7. 


8. 


FIG.  15.— Patterns  7  and  8. 

PATTERNS  7  and  8 

No.  7 

First  Row. — 1  down,  1  up,  1  down,  2  up.     Repeat  three 
times. 


PATTERNS  17 

Second  Roiv. — 1  up,  1  down,  1  up,  1  down,  2  up,  etc. 
Repeat  three  times. 

Third  Row. — 2  up,  1  down,  1  up,  1  down,  2  up,  etc. 

No.  8 

First  Row. — 1  up,  2  down,  2  up,  1  down,  2  up,  2  down, 
2  up,  1  down,  2  up. 

Second  Roiv. — 2  up,  2  down,  2  up,  1  down,  2  up,  2  down, 
2  up,  1  down,  1  up. 


FIG.  1C.— Pattern  9. 


Third  Row. — 1  down,  2  up,  2  down,  2  up,  1  down,  2  up, 
2  down,  2  up,  1  down.  Repeat  for  three  more  rows,  and 
reverse  for  next  six  rows. 

c 


i8  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

The  difficulty  of  these  step  patterns  is  only  at  the 
beginning  of  each  row,  after  which  the  weaving  is  the 
same. 

The  work  is  much  beautified  and  improved  by  weaving 
the  rows  of  a  pattern  in  different  colours.  The  little  weavers 
might  be  allowed  to  choose  their  own  mats  and  strips. 
After  working  this  series  of  patterns  the  children  will  have 
gained  considerable  skill  and  proficiency  in  the  work,  and 
the  lesson  might  with  advantage  be  varied,  and  a  pattern 
given  out  from  dictation,  or  be  written  in  words  upon  the 
blackboard.  Mat  IX.  forms  a  good  exercise  for  employing 
either  method. 

PATTERN  9 

Mat  IX.  must  be  commenced  in  the  centre,  and  a  cor- 
responding strip  woven  top  and  bottom  of  the  centre  each 
time. 

Dictation. — Fold  mat  in  half  and  weave  first  strip  across 
centre. 

1.  1  down,  2  up,  2  down,  2  up,  1  down,  2  up,  2  down, 
2  up,  1  down. 

(2  down,   2  up,  2  down,  3  up,    2  down, 
2  up,  2  down. 

2.  Under  1.  J  2  down,   2  up,  2   down,  3  up,   2   down, 

2  up,  2  down. 

3.  Top  of  2.  1  1  up,  2  down,  2  up,  2  down,  1  up,  2  down, 

3.  Under  3.   j  2  up,  2  down,  1  up. 

4.  ^  2  up,  2  down,  2  up,  3  down,  2  up,  2  down,  2  up, 

4.  J  2  down. 

5.  Same  as  No.  1. 

5.  Same  as  No.  1.     Repeat  from  lines  2. 

Lamp  Mat. — This  pattern  when  finished  makes  a  good 


UTILITY  OF  MATS  19 

centre  for  a  lamp  mat.  The  mat  should  be  pasted  on  the 
centre  of  a  square  of  cardboard,  leaving  a  2-inch  margin 
all  round.  The  margin  is  covered  with  strips  of  fringed 
tissue  paper,  cut  and  curled  about  2  inches  deep. 


UTILITY   OF  MATS 

Amongst  the  numerous  varieties  of  Kindergarten  occupa- 
tions, all  taxing  to  the  utmost  the  skill  and  ingenuity  of  the 
teacher,  it  is  pleasing  to  find  an  occupation  which  is  not 
only  educationally  beneficial,  but  may,  when  completed, 
be  put  to  use. 

Some  teachers  object  to  utilise  the  children's  Kinder- 
garten work,,  and  consider  it  the  proper  thing  to  show  the 
mats  just  as  they  leave  the  children's  hands. 

This  is  hardly  a  correct  principle  to  follow,  because  little 
children  require  stimulation  in  their  work,  and  when  they 
have  completed  all  that  can  be  expected  of  them,  then  it 
is  for  the  teacher  to  further  stimulate  and  show  how  useful 
their  work  can  be  made.  It  is  most  discouraging  to  children 
to  depreciate  their  poorest  work,  for  such  work  might  with 
advantage  be  given  away  after  each  lesson,  and  the  children 
be  encouraged  to  pull  out  the  strips  and  weave  a  pattern  at 
home,  which  they  could  bring  at  the  time  of  the  next  lesson. 

Towards  the  end  of  the  school  year  a  large  number  of 
good  mats  will  necessarily  be  produced  from,  an  ordinary 
class,  and  many  of  these  can  be  easily  turned  to  a  useful 
purpose  without  interfering  with  the  weaving.  These 
useful  little  articles  are  very  pretty  and  attractive  when 
made  in  soft  harmonious  colours,  and  have  a  ready 


As  each  mat  is  finished  the  loose  ends  should  be  cut  even 


20  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

and  gummed  to  the  border,  and  then  placed  in  a  thick  book, 
where  it  will  be  kept  pressed  and  clean  until  wanted.  The 
process  of  mounting  and  making  up  should  be  undertaken 
when  a  teacher  can  afford  to  spend  two  or  three  hours  at 
the  work  at  one  time.  She  should  prepare  beforehand  a 
basin  of  boiled  starch  or  paste  made  in  the  following 
way  : — Take  two  tablespoonfuls  of  flour  (rye  flour  is  best) 
and  mix  with  cold  water  thoroughly  by  stirring  until  the 
paste  has  a  thin  creamy  consistence,  and  then  boil,  when  it 
will  thicken.  If  found  too  thick  in  cooling,  add  boiling 
water  till  the  desired  degree  of  thickness  be  obtained. 
Use  a  soft  brush,  and  put  on  as  little  paste  as  possible. 

Paste  very  evenly,  and  upon  a  large  surface,  rub  the 
paste  with  the  flat  open  hand.  The  hand  will  wash,  and 
this  process  smooths  out  the  lumps  better  than  any  other. 
Do  not  paste  the  mats,  but  the  material  upon  which  they 
are  to  be  mounted.  Place  the  mats  in  position  and  press 
smooth  with  a  sheet  of  clean  blotting-paper  and  soft  cloth, 
and  leave  to  dry.  If  required  to  form  a  round  object  the 
mats  must  be  tied  whilst  damp  to  a  bottle  or  tin  to  dry 
in  that  position.  Several  of  the  most  proficient  workers 
might  do  all  the  pasting  under  the  superintendence  of  the 
teacher. 

TOILET  TIDY 

Five  mats  are  required  for  this  triple  toilet  tidy. 

Two  mats  are  mounted  on  a  piece  of  tinted  cardboard 
for  the  foundation. 

Three  others  are  twisted  into  scoops,  and  fastened 
together  with  brass-headed  paper  fasteners,  and  fixed  with 
the  same  to  the  foundation  card. 

The  corners  and  centre  are  finished  with  cut  rosettes 


UTILITY  OF  MA  TS  2 1 

of  crinkled  paper,  and  the  whole  suspended  with   a  bow 
of  ribbon. 


FIG.  17.— Toilet  Tidy. 

Colours. — White  mats  and  pale  yellow  strips,  ribbon,  and 
rosettes. 

FLOWER  VASE 

Four  mats  are  required  for  this  object.  Paste  the  four 
separately  upon  pink-tinted  cardboard,  and  leave  under  a 
weight  to  dry.  When  dry,  cut  each  to  the  shape  of 
diagram,  which  exactly  fits  the  mat  without  cutting  the 
weaving. 


22 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


Join  the  sides  together  by  pricking  holes  J  inch  apart, 
and  sew  up  and  back  again  to  form  a  cross  stitch.  This 
joining  can  be  done  by  the  children  with  the  exception  of 
the  last  side,  which  the  teacher  must  join,  and  also  sew 
in  a  4-inch  square  to  form  the  bottom. 


FIG.  18.— Flower  Vase. 


FIG.  19. 


The  upper  edge  may  be  finished  with  a  cut  ruche  of 
crinkled  paper,  or  be  snipped  in  points,  as  in  Fig.  18. 

Colours. — Brown  and  pink. 

When  finished  the  sides  must  be  pressed  open  and  the 
lower  portions  forced  out,  as  in  Fig.  18. 

HEXAGONAL  FLOWER-POT  COVER 

Colours. — White  mats  and  yellow  strips. 
Six  mats  are  required  to  make  this  cover.     Paste  the 
mats  J  inch  apart  upon  a  continuous  strip  of  cardboard  7J 


UTILITY  OF  MATS  23 

inches  wide.  Crease  outwards  the  cardboard  between  each 
mat,  and  fold  up  and  place  under  a  weight  to  dry.  Cover 
each  crease,  and  top  and  bottom,  with  ruches  of  crinkled 


.—  Hexagonal  Flower-pot  Cover. 


paper,  and  fasten  together  in  hexagonal  shape.  Or  mount 
each  mat  separately,  and  then  overlap  and  fasten  borders 
together  with  brass-headed  fasteners,  as  in  Fig.  20. 

FOURFOLD  FIRE-SCREEN 

This  is  a  very  good  and  simple  method  of  using  the 
mats.  The  screens  are  useful  for  showing  the  various 
patterns  taught  during  the  year,  and  they  form  a  pleasing 
reminiscence  when  used  as  fire-screens  in  school  during 
the  summer  months.  Cut  four  strips  of  stout  cardboard 
27  inches  long  and  10  inches  wide.  Arrange  the  mats 
evenly,  with  a  margin  of  1 J  inches  round  each. 

Join  the  four  strips  of  cardboard  together  at  the  back, 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


by  "glueing"  or  "gumming"  strips  of  unbleached   calico 
down  the  three  openings.      The  sides  must  not  be  quite 


FIG.  21.— Fourfold  Fire-screen. 

close  together,  but  sufficiently  apart  that  the  calico  may 
act  as  a  hinge,  and  allow  the  screen  to  be  folded  or  un- 
folded. 

STAGE  III. 

This  stage  is  the  most  advanced  in  mat-plaiting,  and  is 
suitable  for  upper  infants,  or  for  children  who  have  passed 
through  Stages  I.  and  II. 

The  mats  used  in  this  stage  consist  of  very  fine  strips, 
which  will  need  delicacy  of  touch  in  weaving.  The  patterns 
will  be  more  complicated  and  advanced  in  difficulty,  arid 


UTILITY  OF  MATS  25 

comprise  numbers  1  -5  in  the  formation  of  the  designs.  At  this 
stage  it  is  desirable  to  cultivate  in  the  children  an  artistic 
taste  in  the  choice  of  colours.  All  crude  primary  colours 
should  be  avoided,  and  preference  be  given  to  the  combina- 
tions of  soft  neutral  tints  and  art  shades.  These  colours 
are  procurable  at  the  best  Kindergarten  depots,  and  the 
designs,  when  finished,  are  most  effective.  Children  at 
this  stage  should  thoroughly  understand  the  theory  of  their 
occupation,  and  a  lesson  upon  weaving  should  be  given. 
Show  picture  of  a  loom,  and  tell  children  that  the  threads 
which  run  from  end  to  end  of  a  piece  of  cloth  are  called 
the  "  warp,"  and  the  threads  which  run  across  from  selvedge 
to  selvtedge  are  known  by  the  name  of  "weft"  or  "woof." 
The  threads  of  the  weft  are  wound  round  the  shuttle  which 
weaves  across  the  "warp."  Draw  the  following  com- 
parison between  the  mat  and  the  loom  : — 

Comparison.— (I)  The  frame  of  loom  to  border  of  mat. 

(2)  The  warp  threads  to  the  tight  strips. 

(3)  The  weft  threads  to  the  loose  strips. 

(4)  The  shuttle  to  the  plaiting  needle. 

The  chief  difference  between  this  and  the  previous  stage 
is  that  the  patterns  are  dictated  or  written  on  the  black- 
board by  the  teacher,  and  thus  great  concentration  is 
brought  into  the  work  because  the  children  are  intent  upon 
the  development  of  the  pattern.  The  mats  are  used  in 
duplicate,  as  in  Stage  II.,  and  patterns  taught  upon  the 
stiff  class  mat  are  reproduced  upon  the  corresponding  thin 
mat.  Children  should  be  allowed  to  choose  their  own 
colours,  and  invent,  reverse,  and  contrast  patterns.  Using 
strips  of  different  colours  and  widths  will  vary  the  effect 
of  the  patterns  considerably. 

How  to  Make  a  Mat  of  any  Shape. — Teachers  may,  with  a 
little  ingenuity,  produce  any  shaped  article  in  mat-plaiting. 


26  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

The  shape  should  first  be  drawn  and  cut  out.  The  outline 
should  again  be  traced  half  an  inch  from  the  edge  to  form 
the  border  of  the  mat.  The  inner  space  is  then  marked 
off  in  J-inch  spaces,  and  with  ruler  and  sharp  pen- 
knife vertical  strips  are  cut,  and  afterwards  woven.  The 
toilet  tidy  is  an  article  made  in  this  way. 

TOILET  TIDY 

It  is  drawn  and  cut  from  a  sheet  of  thin  tinted  card- 
board.    It  consists  of  two  pieces.     The   outline  is  drawn 


FIG.  22.— Toilet  Tidy. 


UTILIl'Y  OF  MATS  27 

in  pencil  and  cut  out,  and  a  margin  of  half  an  inch  from 


FIG.  24. 

the  edge  is  left  to  form  the  border  of  the  mat.     The  inner 


28 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


space  is  then  ruled  in  lines  an  eighth  of  an  inch  apart,  and 
cut  with  a  sharp  penknife.  Each  portion  is  treated  in  the 
same  way,  and  afterwards  woven  by  the  children.  Punched 
holes  and  bows  of  ribbon  tie  the  parts  together. 


PATTERNS  FOR  STAGE  III. 

The  following  patterns  illustrate  various  exercises  which 
have  been  dictated  in  successive  lessons,  and  reproduced  in 
entirety  upon  the  thin  mat.  To  reverse  a  pattern  children 
simply  have  to  copy  from  the  wrong  side  of  their  mats. 


PATTERNS  1,  2,  3 

No.  1 

First  Row. — 3  down,  3  up.          Third  Roiv. — 1  down,  1  up. 
Second  Row. — 3  up,  3  down.       Fourth  Row. — 1  up,  1  down. 


1. 


FIG.  23.— Patterns  1,  2,  3. 


UTILITY  OF  MATS 


29 


No.  2 

First  Row. — 1  down,  1  up.          Third  Row. — 1  up,  1  down. 
Second  Row.—?,  down,  3  up.       Fourth  Row. — 3  up,  3  down. 

No.  3 

First  Row. — 1  up,  1  down.          Third  Row.— I  down,  1  up. 
Second  Row. — 3  down,  3  up.       Fourth  Row. — 3  up,  3  down. 

PATTERNS  4,  5 

No.  4 

First  fioiv.—3  down,  1  up,  5      FourthRow.—l  up,  5  down, 
down,  1  up.     Repeat.  1     up,     5     down.        Re- 

Second  Row. — 2  down,  1  up,          peat. 

1   down,    1   up,    3    down.      Fifth  Row. — Same  as  third- 
Repeat.  Sixth  Row.—S&mQ  as  second. 
Third  Row. — 1  down,  1  up,      Seventh     Row.  —  Same     as 
3  down,  1  up.     Repeat.  first. 


4. 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


No.  5 

First  Row. — 5   up,   1   down.  F mirth  Row. — 2  up,  1  down, 

Repeat.  5  up.     Repeat. 

Second  Row. — 1  down,  3  up,  Fifth  Row. — Same  as  third. 

1  down,  1  up.     Repeat.  Sixth  Row. — Same  as  second. 

Third  Row.—\  up,  1  down,  1  Seventh     Row.  —  Same     as 

up,  1  down,  3  up.    Repeat.  first. 


PATTERNS  6,  7,  8 
No.  6 

First  Row. — 3  down,  3    up.  Fourth  Row. — 3  up,  3  down. 

Repeat.  Repeat. 

Second  Mow. — 1  down,  1  up.  Fifth  Row.  1  up,  1  down. 

Repeat.  Repeat. 

Third  Row. — Same  as  first.  Sixth  Row. — Same  as  fourth. 


FIG.  27.— Patterns  6,  7, 


UTILITY  OF  MATS  31 

No.  7 

First  Row. — 1   up,   1   down.  Fourth  Row — 1  down,  1  up. 

Repeat.  Repeat. 

Second  Row. — 3  up,  3  down.  Fifth  Row. — 3  down,  3  up. 

Repeat.  Repeat. 

Third  Row. — Same  as  first.  Sixth  Row. — Same  as  fourth. 

No.  8 

First  Row. — 3  .down,   1  up.      Second  Row. — 3  up,  1  down. 
Repeat.  Repeat. 


PATTERNS  9,  10,  11 
No.  9 

First  Row. — 1  up,  1  down,  1  up,  3  down.  Repeat. 
Transfer  the  pattern  one  strip  to  left  for  three  succeeding 
rows. 


10. 


11 


FIG.  28.— Patterns  9,  10, 11. 


32  VARIED  OCCUPA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VING 

No.  10 

First  turn  mats  over  and  copy  No.  9  from  the  wrong 
side. 

No.  11 

First  Row. — 5  down,  5  up.  down,  1  up,  3  down,  1  up, 

Second  Row. — 2  down,  1  up,  1  down,  3  up,  1  down. 

2    down,   2    up,    1    down,  Fourth  Row. — Same  as  second. 

2  up,    2   down,    1   up,   2  Fifth  Row. — Same  as  third. 

down.  For  6,  7,  8,  9,  10  rows 

Third  Row. — 1  down,  3  up,  1  alternate  pattern. 


PATTERNS  11,  12,  13 

The  patterns  given  in  this  illustration  are  so  plain  as  to 
need  no  explanation. 


12. 


13. 


14. 


FIG.  29.— Patterns  11,  12,  13. 


USEFUL  APPLICATION  OF  THE  MATS  33 


USEFUL  APPLICATION  OF  THE  MATS 

The  mats  of  this  stage  having  fine  strips,  the  designs 
are  consequently  smaller  and  suitable  for  cutting  to  various 
shapes.  The  mats  must  first  be  prepared  by  pasting  them 
entirely  over  on  the  under  side  with  tissue  paper,  or 
mounting  them  upon  tinted  cardboard,  which  can  be 
bought  in  packets  ready  gummed,  and  need  only  moistening 
with  a  damp  sponge  before  placing  on  the  mat. 

Prepare  a  number  of  mats  in  this  way,  and  place  under 
a  weight  to  dry  in  a  perfectly  flat  position.  This  done, 
the*  mats  have  now  to  be  cut  to  the  desired  shape,  and  the 
edges  finished  by  binding  them  in  ribbon  or  a  strip  of 
gummed  paper. 

PEN-WIPERS  AND  NEEDLE-BOOKS 

The  following  shapes  : — Butterfly,  fan,  heart,  and  bellows 
are  very  suitable  for  pen-wipers  and  needle-books. 

Mount  the  mats  on  tinted  cardboard,  and  cut  two  of 
each  shape  for  each  article,  bind  the  edges  with  narrow 
ribbon,  insert  snipped  leaves  of  cloth  or  flannel,  and  tie 
together  with  ribbon. 

SLIPPER  POCKET 

Two  mats  are  required  for  the  entire  slipper.  The 
pattern  can  be  cut  from  an  ordinary  oblong  mat.  Place 
the  pattern  diagonally  upon  the  mat,  and  let  the  heel 
portion  cover  the  weaving,  without  the  border,  as  this  is 
the  part  that  will  show  when  finished.  The  toe  will  reach 

D 


34  VARIED  OCCUPA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VING 

to  the  edge  of  border  opposite,  but  this  will  not  signify,  as 
the  toe-cap  will  hide  it.  Cut  out  both  portions  and  bind 
the  edges  with  narrow  ribbon  or  paper.  Sew  on  the 
toe-cap,  and  add  a  loop  of  ribbon  at  the  heel.  Two  shoes 
alike  should  go  together  as  a  pair. 

SERVIETTE  RING 

A  pretty  present  of  six  different  rings  in  a  cardboard  box 
may  be  easily  made  of  mats. 


FIG.  30.— Slipper  Pocket.  FIG.  31.— Serviette  Ring. 

Procure  a  Seidlitz-powder  box,  and  ornament  the  top 
with  a  pretty  mat ;  the  rest  of  the  box  will  do,  as  it  is 
white  with  gold  stars. 

The  rings  are  made  from  twelve  centre  strips  of  a  No.  V. 
mat.  The  two  outer  strips  form  the  border  and  the  other 
ten  strips  are  woven.  The  strip  when  finished  is  mounted 


USEFUL  APPLICATION  OF  THE  MATS 


35 


on  thin  cardboard,  and  fastened  into  a  circular  form  whilst 
damp,  by  two  paper  fasteners,  and  ornamented  with  bow 
of  ribbon  to  harmonise  in  colour.  Place  all  six  in  the  box 
with  the  bows  uppermost. 

CARD  BASKET 

This  consists  of  seven  irregular  hexagons,  each  one  bound 
with  narrow  ribbon  to  harmonise  with  mat.      A  regular 


FIG.  32.— Card  Basket. 

hexagon  forms  the  bottom  and  the  others  are  sewn  round  it. 
Small  mats  with  border  suitable  for  this  basket  are  sold  in 
packets  by  Messrs.  Newman  and  Co.,  Berners  Street,  W. 
They  simply  need  mounting  and  tying  together  with  ribbon, 
and  thus  the  necessity  of  binding  is  avoided. 


VASE  FOR  PAMPAS-GRASS  OR  UMBRELLAS 

This  is  a  very  easy  method  of  using  up  a  quantity  of 
mats.       Prepare    the    mats   with   tissue    paper    as    before 


36  VARIED*  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

directed,  and  cut  them  into  any  convenient  shape,  such  as 


FIG.  33. — Vase  for  Pampas-grass  or  Umbrellas. 

squares,  diamonds,  rhomboids,  or  hexagons.     Have  ready 
a  sheet  of  stout  cardboard  (18  in.  by  22  in.),  cut  to  the  size 


OPEN  WEAVING  37 

of  an  ordinary  drain-pipe.  Lay  the  cardboard  flat  on  the 
table,  and  paste  on  the  hexagons  in  patchwork  form, 
arranging  the  colours  to  form  a  harmonious  combination. 
As  each  hexagon  is  laid  in  position,  place  a  flat-iron  or 
other  weight  upon  it  whilst  fixing  the  next,  and  so  on  till 
the  cardboard  is  covered.  Finish  the  joins  by  pasting 
across  strips  of  narrow  gold  or  silver  paper.  Or  if  desired, 
the  hexagons  may  be  placed  to  touch  at  the  corners  only, 
and  show  a  plain  hexagon  of  the  tinted  cardboard  and 
alternate  with  one  of  mat-plaiting,  then  no  binding  will  be 
needed.  Join  the  cardboard  ends  together,  and  fasten  neatly 
with  large  brass  paper  fasteners,  or  paste  a  strip  of  calico 
downthe  join  inside.  If  filled  with  pampas-grass  it  is  a  pretty 
decoration  for  a  corner  of  a  room.  A  round  bottom  may 
be  glued  in,  and  three  or  four  large  cotton  reels  enamelled 
arid  fastened  on  for  legs. 

If  an  ordinary  drain-pipe  be  procured,  the  mats  can  be 
pasted  on  in  crazy  patchwork  style,  and,  well  sized  and 
varnished,  will  become  a  durable  and  handsome  mosaic- 
looking  stand  for  a  hall  or  room. 


OPEN  WEAVING 

This  work  is  a  very  pleasant  change  for  the  proficient' 
weavers.  The  patterns  are  geometrical,  and  open  in 
construction,  and  the  weaving  interlaces  the  tight  strips 
first  horizontally  and  then  diagonally. 

The  beauty  of  the  work  lies  chiefly  in  the  open  spaces 
which  are  left  in  the  plaiting,  and  which,  when  filled  in 
with  a  contrasting  coloured  lining,  adds  to  the  effect  of  the 
weaving. 

The  materials  used  for  teaching  are  the  ordinary  paper 


38  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Mats  III.  and  IV.,  with  needles  and  loose  strips.  The 
latter  require  to  be  7  or  9  inches  long  for  the  longest 
diagonals. 

Square  mats  are  best  for  the  purpose,  because  the 
children  may  be  taught,  without  difficulty,  the  meaning  of 
diagonal,  and  the  weaving  would  be  less  puzzling  than 
upon  the  oblong  mat.  However,  oblong  mats  can  be 
successfully  used  for  the  work,  but  the  centre  diagonal  will 
not  run  from  corner  to  corner,  as  it  would  in  the  square 
mat. 

The  illustrations  are  copied  from  Mat  IV.,  an  oblong 
mat  of  fifteen  tight  strips.  The  illustrations  show  the  right 
side  of  the  mat. 

LESSON  I 

PREPARATION  OF  MAT 

Materials  required.— Give  each  child  (1)  a  white  paper 
mat ;  (2)  a  pair  of  paper  scissors ;  and  (3)  a  small  piece 
of  blotting-paper. 

Note. — Mats  should  have  the  borders  ready  gummed  before 
distribution  ;  if  not  bought  ready  prepared,  the  teacher  should 
do  this  herself,  as  it  is  not  practicable  to  have  a  large  class  of  infants 
using  wet  gum  without  spoiling  the  greater  portion  of  the  work. 

Plan  Of  Lesson.— The  strips  should  next  be  counted 
(fifteen).  Children  to  name  how  many  threes  in  fifteen,  and 
with  unthreaded  needles  to  "lift"  three  up  and  one  down 
across  the  mat. 

Let  them  raise  the  needle  slightly,  about  one  inch  from 
the  top  of  the  mat,  and  hold  in  position  until  teacher  has 
inspected  the  class. 

This  done,  the  children  will  cut  through  the  strips  upon 


OPEN  WEAVING 


39 


the  needle,  and  afterwards  cut  them  away  quite  neat  and 
even  with  the  border,  top  and  bottom.  Three  strips  will 
be  cut  away  four  times  in  the  mat  referred  to,  which  should 
present  the  appearance  of  Fig.  34. 


FIG.  34. 


HORIZONTAL  CROSSING 

Turn  mats  right  side  downwards  with  the  gummed  side 
uppermost,  and  let  the  children  use  strips  of  another  colour, 
e.g.  "red." 

Five  strips  are  now  laid  horizontally  across  the  mat 
about  three-quarter  inch  apart,  to  form  squares  with  the 
vertical  strands. 

Children  should  give  the  definition  of  a  square,  and,  if 
necessary,  they  might  measure  and  mark  the  spaces  with 
ruler  and  pencil  before  fixing  their  strips. 


4o 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


It  is  better  not  to  weave  the  horizontal  strips,  but  simply 
lay  them  across  at  right  angles  to  the  vertical  ones,  and 
with  a  damp  sponge  or  slightly  moist  finger  wet  the  border, 


FIG.  35. 

and  fix  each  strip  in  position,  pressing  the  part  with  the 
blotting-paper. 

This  preparation  will  form  one  lesson.  The  mats  must 
be  collected  with  the  blotting-paper  between  each  and 
placed  under  a  weight  till  dry. 


DIAGONAL  WEAVING 
LESSON   II 

Give  children  a  lesson  upon  the  "  diagonal,"  and  illus- 
trate upon   blackboard  and  show  what  is  meant  by  the 


'DIAGONAL   WEAVING 


diagonal   in  geometrical   figures.     Children  to  repeat  "A 
diagonal  is  a  line  passing  through  opposite  angles." 

Children  to  touch  the  angles  of  their  mat,  and  show  the 
course  a  diagonal  would  take.  Turn  mats  with  gummed 
borders  underneath,  and  examine  the  strips  already  upon 
the  mat.  Children  will  soon  notice  that  all  verticals 
are  up  and  horizontals  down,  and  as  previous  weaving 


V 


FIG.  30. 

exercises  have  taught  generally  to  "  lift  up  "  those  that  are 
down,  the  children  will  tell  that  the  new  strip  will  "lift 
up"  the  horizontals  that  are  down,  and  pass  over  the 
verticals. 

Use  a  strip  of  different  colour  (blue)  and  begin  under 
the  border  at  bottom  right-hand  corner  and  pass  over  first 
vertical  and  "  lift  up  "  the  first  horizontal.  Continue  over 
each  vertical  and  under  each  horizontal  till  the  strip  reaches 
the  other  side.  Begin  at  next  space  and  continue  till  mat 


42 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


is  entirely  crossed  one  way,  as  in  Fig.  36.  Cut  strips 
and  gum  in  position.  It  is  easy  to  say  "  Lift  up  all  the  red 
strips  and  pass  over  the  white  ones." 

Second  Diagonal. — Turn  mats  the  lengthway  and  the 
second  diagonal  will  then  follow  the  same  rule  as  first,  viz. 
"lift  up"  the  horizontal  strands.  Use  again  a  different 
colour  (yellow),  because  it  is  so  much  easier  to  examine 
and  give  definite  commands  if  the  colours  be  different  for 
each  weaving.  When  the  children  thoroughly  understand 


FIG.  37. 

what  to  do,  then  the  weaving  may  be  of  one  or  two  colours, 
as  desired,  and  afterwards  lined  with  a  contrasting  shade. 
Two  opposite  diagonals  must  cross  each  other,  always  with 
the  mat  strip  between,  they  must  never  touch  ;  if  they  do,  the 
weaving  is  wrong. 

The  diagonal  strips  will  be  of  different  lengths,  and 
should  be  measured  and  cut  as  they  are  fixed  in  position. 

Teacher  should  illustrate  each  point  herself  upon  a  large 
mat  before  the  children. 

Diagonal  weaving  is  best  worked  on  the  right  side  of 


DIAGONAL   WEAVING  43 

the  mat,  as  the  different  coloured  strips  materially  assist  the 
accuracy  of  the  work. 

The  mats  may  be  utilised  and  made  into  pretty  articles 
like  the  plain  weaving  mats.  They  look  well  lined  with 
coloured  tissue  paper  before  mounting  on  cardboard. 

Handkerchief  Sachet. — The  illustration  is  a  very  useful 
handkerchief  sachet,  made  of  four  square  mats.  The  mats 


PIG.  38.— Handkerchief  Satchet. 

used  are  the  "  City  taffeta  mats,"  sold  by  Charles  and  Dible. 
They  are  prettily  traced  in  gold,  and  are  issued  in  good  art 
colours.  Those  used  for  this  illustration  were  two  peacock 
blue  and  two  old  gold  mats.  The  four  were  pasted  to  a 
square  of  terra  cotta  sateen;  each  mat  was  creased  diagonally 
to  the  centre  whilst  the  paste  was  damp,  and  the  points 
finished  with  bow  and  ends  of  ribbon.  There  are  also  some 
very  durable  morocco  leather  mats  and  a  very  dainty  lace- 
bordered  kind,  useful  for  the  same  purpose. 


44 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


FKEE  WEAVING 

Description. — Free    weaving,    as    the   term    implies, 
signifies  weaving  with  loose  strips  only.     There  is  no  mat 
.  as  in  ordinary  weaving,  but  the 

free  strips  are  so  interlaced  as 
to  form  mat  and  strips  com- 
bined. 

The  occupation  is  suitable 
for  children  who  possess  a 
knowledge  of  weaving. 

The  advantages  of  this  weav- 
ing are : — 

1.  Both  sides  of  the  work 
are  alike,  and  therefore  needs 
no  lining  or  mounting. 

2.  Any  sized  piece  of  work, 
of  any  shape,  may  be  made. 

3.  The  work  can  be  used  in 
as  many  ways  as  ordinary  mat- 
plaiting. 

4.  The  work  can  be  applied 
to    ribbons,    cloth,    and    other 
materials  for  producing  useful 
articles. 

Materials  required.— 

Long  strips  of  paper  of  any 
width,  and  of  two  different  colours.  These  may  be  folded 
and  cut  in  brown  and  cartridge  paper  by  the  children,  but 
it  is  preferable  to  buy  the  strips  in  packets  ready  prepared 
for  this  work. 


X 


FIG. 


FREE   WEAVING  45 

They  may  be  bought  in  four  colours :  cream,  brown, 
pink,  and  gray,  at  6d.  per  packet. 

The  cream  and  brown  are  thick,  and  the  pink  and  gray 
thin  in  quality. 

Strips  of  gold,  silver,  and  other  bright  colours  may  be 
bought,  also  borders  for  finishing  the  work. 

Method  of  Teaching1. — Give  each  child  two  strips  of 
cream  paper  about  fourteen  or  sixteen  inches  long  and  half 
an  inch  wide.  These  form  the  loose  mat. 

Double  the  strips  in  half,  and  place  vertically  side  by 
side  upon  the  desk,  thus  : — Loop  end  top  of  first  strip,  and 
free  ends  top  of  second  strip,  as  in  Fig.  39,  A. 

As  these  vertical  strips  are  troublesome  for  the  children 
to  keep  in  position  until  a  little  weaving  has  been  done,  it 
is  advisable  to  fasten  them  with  drawing  pins  to  the  desk 
or  a  mill-board.  The  latter  is  to  be  preferred,  because  the 
work  could  be  kept  flat  and  collected  each  week  on  the 
board  until  the  piece  required  was  finished. 

The  vertical  strips  must  always  be  of  the  same  colour, 
and  different  to  the  horizontal  ones. 

Distribute  four  or  six  brown  strips  about  five  or  six 
inches  long,  and  of  same  width  as  the  vertical  strips. 
Double  in  half,  open  the  ends,  and  pass  the  double  cream 
inside,  then  pass  both  ends  of  the  brown  through  the  loop 
of  next  cream  strip,  drawing  the  ends  tightly  through. 

Children  will  readily  learn  that  the  brown  and  cream 
take  it  in  turns  to  go  inside  and  outside  of  each  other  (Fig. 
39,  B). 

Take  a  second  brown  strip,  double  in  half,  and  repeat 
the  process  from  fe/SMiand  side,  viz.  outside  first  double 
cream,  and  inside  second  double  cream.  In  passing  outside, 
one  end  is  on  top  of  vertical  double  strip,  and  one  is  under. 
Fig.  40,  C. — Continue  weaving  from  the  right  and  left 


46  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

alternately,  until  the  desired  length  is  attained.  The  first 
exercise  might  be  letter  I,  as  children  should  not  attempt 
anything  requiring  more  than  two  vertical  strips  until  the 
work  is  understood.  Most  of  the  straight-lined  letters  of 
the  alphabet  may  be  made  in  this  way,  and  any  width  of 
strip  can  be  used.  The  letters  look  well,  mounted  to  form 
texts  and  mottoes. 

c 


FIG.  40. 

To  Finish. — Remove  the  drawing  pins  and  take  hold  of 
ends  top  and  bottom  of  the  vertical  strips,  and  pull  tightly 
until  the  loop  ends  lie  close  to  the  horizontal  strips.  Next 
pull  every  two  horizontal  strips  right  and  left  in  the  same 
way  till  the  weaving  is  close  and  compact.  The  ends 
must  be  cut  and  turned  under  and  pasted,  or  cut  close  to 
the  weaving  with  a  touch  of  gum  to  keep  them  in  place. 
The  work  is  easily  joined  by  interweaving  the  ends  on  one 
side  into  the  loops  of  the  opposite  side. 


FREE  WEAVING 


47 


To  make  letters  L  and  T,  and  crosses  and  shapes  requir- 
ing wider  portions,  the  weaving  strips  introduced  must  be 
long  enough  for  the  wide  part,  and  extend  equally  both 


FIG.  41. 

sides,  as  in  T,  or  only  one  side,  as  in  L.  In  both  cases  the 
vertical  portion  is  woven  first,  but  long  horizontal  strips  in- 
troduced where  the  wide  part  of  the  letter  will  come. 

Turn  letter  round  so  that  the  long  strips  thus  inserted 
become  vertical  strips,  and  work  them  as  such,  getting  the 
base  of  L  and  the  arms  of  T  in  this  way. 

Shaped  letters,  such  as  0,  S,  Q,  etc.,  are  made  by  cutting 


FIG.  42. 


the  letter  out  in  duplicate,  and  using  these  doubled  forms 
in  the  same  way  as  two  vertical  strips.  For  example,  to 
make  letter  0,  cut  two  large  ovals  of  exact  size  and  width, 
and  lay  on  desk  on  top  of  each  other.  Next  cut  two  smaller 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


circles  from  the  centres  cut  out  of  the  large  ones,  because 
these  two  inner  circles  must  fit  exactly  inside  the  two  large 
ones. 

There  are  now  four  circles,  viz.  a  pair  of  large  ones  out- 
side, and  a  pair  of  small  inside. 

Secure  these  in  position  with  a  drawing  pin  until  a  little 
weaving  holds  them  together. 

Take  some  short  strips,  and 
narrow  them  off  to  fit  the  inner 
circle,  first  the  loop  and  next  the 
free  ends.  Weave  these  strips  in 
and  out  the  double  circles,  just  in 
the  same  manner  as  straight  weav- 
ing. 

These  shapes  are  more  difficult 
to  manage,  and  not  easily  done  by 
infants,  but  it  is  well  to  know 
how  to  make  them  should  a  word 
require  their  use. 

Uses.  —  Square  photo  frames 
with  cut-out  centres  are  easily 
made,  also  mats,  picture  frames, 
wall  pockets,  handkerchief  sachets, 
crosses,  doll's  furniture  in  outline, 
such  as  table,  chair,  stool,  box,  etc. 
Small  squares  woven  in  strips  of  cloth,  or  dress  material, 
and  bound  with  red  braid,  make  useful  iron  and  kettle 
holders.  Two  coloured  braids  could  be  used  instead. 
Strips  of  red  and  gray  list  woven  in  this  way  make  admir- 
able stays  for  children,  and  require  no  lining.  A  simple 
binding  of  braid  is  all  that  is  necessary. 

Hanging  Bag. — This  little  bag  is  made  of  four  strips  of 
pink  ribbon,  18  inches  long,  interwoven  by  sixteen  strips  of 


FIG.  43. 


FREE   WEAVING 


49 


green  the  same  length. 
Fold  the  strips  in  half, 
and  arrange  them  in 
the  following  order : 
Loop  end,  free  ends  ; 
loop  ends,  free  ends,  as 
in  Fig.  43.  Remember 
that  the  vertical  strips 
are  always  of  an  even 
number,  and  corre- 
spond top  and  bottom 
in  the  number  of  loops 
and  free  ends.  Begin 
as  directed  in  illustra- 
tions A,  B,  C,  D,  weav- 
ing outside  and  inside 
the  four  vertical  strips, 
beginning  at  the  right 
side.  Take  another 
strip,  and  reverse  the 
process,  beginning  on 
the  left.  If  the  work 
be  not  fastened,  it 
can  be  turned  over  each 
time,  from  R  to  L, 
when  the  weaving  will 
always  be  from  the 
right-hand  side,  and 
each  row  identical  in 
procedure. 

Join  the  strip  into 
circular  form  by  in- 
terlacing the  free  pink 


FIG.  44.— Hanging  Bag. 


50  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

ends  into  the  weaving,  and  mount  the  work  upon  a 
small  strip  of  cardboard  covered  in  pink  silk  to  retain  the 
circular  form.  The  lower  portion  is  a  bag  of  silk,  over  which 
the  green  ribbons  fall  and  are  gathered  together,  and 
finished  with  a  bow  of  ribbon.  Turn  over  the  pink  ends 
at  top,  and  thread  into  the  weaving  to  form  a  looped  edge. 
Also  add  ribbon  to  each  side  to  suspend  the  tidy. 

Handkerchief  Sachets. — The  strips  are  all  of  equal  length, 

and  of  two  coloured  rib- 
bons 1  inch  wide.  Weave 
a  square  of  8  inches,  and 
leave  the  ends  of  equal 
length  on  all  four  sides. 

Take  the  ends  of  two 
adjoining  sides  and  alternate 
them,  one  on  the  other, 
widening  the  space  gradually 

FIG.  45.-Handkerchief  Sachet.  {rom     the     comer         Fagten 

with  a  few  stitches,  and  ornament  with  bow  of  ribbon. 
Tie  the  two  halves  together  with  an  end  of  each  coloured 
ribbon,  blue  and  yellow,  or  green  and  pink. 


FANCY  WEAVING 

This  is  a  very  simple  occupation,  and  combines  exercises 
in  paper-folding,  cutting,  and  weaving.  It  is  suitable  for 
children  who  have  had  some  practice  in  paper-folding  and 
cutting.  The  occupation  will  be  found  not  only  attractive, 
but  educationally  good  in  training  the  "  hand  and  eye  "  and 
in  combining  colours.  Any  width  of  strip  may  be  cut, 
either  broad  or  narrow,  to  suit  the  requirements  of  the 
article  to  be  made. 


FANCY  WEAVING 


The  beauty  of  the  work  lies  in  the  groundwork,  which 
should  be  of  a  contrasting  shade  to  show  through  the  inter- 
lacings.  Strips  of  tissue  paper  cut  in  this  way  are  useful 
for  decorating  gilt  frames  as  a  preservation  from  fly-blows. 

Materials  required. — Foolscap,  newspaper,  cartridge, 
or  tissue.  Kindergarten  scissors. 

Method  Of  Teaching.— For  teaching  purposes  any  used 
stationery  is  suitable,  which  must  be  first  cut  in  strips  about 
three  or  four  inches  wide.  Distribute  strip  of  paper  and  a 
pair  of  scissors  to  each  child  in  class,  and  all  must  work  simul- 
taneously with  the  teacher  to  the  following  commands  : — 

1.  Fold  strips  in  half,  lengthways. 

2.  Turn  down  the  double  edges  about  half  an  inch  and 
crease  sharply,  the  whole  length  of  strip. 

3.  Raise  the  edges  folded  down,  and  hold  both  together 
in  left  hand,  the  centre  fold  being  to  the  right. 

4.  Cut   obliquely   from  folded   edge   across   to   crease. 
Begin  about  one  inch  from  the  top  of 

folded  edge  and  cut  in  a  slanting  line  to 
top  of  crease. 

5.  Continue  to  cut  a  series  of  oblique 
cuts  down  the  whole  length  of  strip, 
making  each  cut  J  inch  in  width. 

6.  Open  papers. 

Interlacing.  —  1.    Turn   papers    with 
the  angles  pointing  to  the  top. 

2.  Turn  down  every  alternate  angle 
as  far  as  it  will  go,  and  crease  the  folds 
at  sides  horizontally. 

3.  Turn  down  angles  2,  4,  6,  8,  10, 

e^Ci  FIG.  46.— Open  papers. 

4.  Pass  the  points  of  upward  angles  over  and  under  the 
points  of  downward  angles. 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


5.  If  desired,  strips  of  narrow  ribbon  or  paper  may  be 
interwoven  in  the 
open  spaces,  and 
add  to  the  effect. 
Used  in  this  way, 
the  strips  are 
pretty  and  useful 
as  bookmarkers. 

Care  must  be 
taken  that  the 
cuts  are  of  equal 
width  and  length, 
otherwise  the  pat- 
tern will  not  be 
symmetrical. 
The  wider  the 

FIG.  47—Angles.  gtrip)       an(j       the        ^  48._Interlaced. 

more  angular  the  cut,  the  greater  will  be  the  number  of 
interlacings. 

Newspaper  Rack. 
—  The  weaving 
portion  is  made 
of  thin  blue  card- 
board, folded  and 
cut  to  the  above 
directions. 

The  strips  after 
being  interlaced 
are  mounted  upon 
a  stiff  cardboard 
foundation  of 
terra  cotta  card- 
board. The  sides 


FIG.  49.— Newspaper  Rack. 


PAPER-PLAITING  53 

are  open,  and  attached  to  the  back  by  loops  of  ribbon. 
Any  shaped  tidy  may  be  fashioned  and  covered  with  this 
work  in  the  same  way  as  ordinary  paper  mats. 

Spill  stands  are  very  suitable  articles  to  make,  because 
the  width  of  the  paper  may  be  cut  to  the  height  of  the  stand, 
and  only  a  short  strip  will  be  needed  to  go  round. 


PAPER-PLAITING 

Children  who  have  been  taught  the  various  kinds  of 
weaving,  as  explained  in  preceding  lessons,  will  readily  take 
an  intelligent  interest  in  the  following  adaptations  of  the 
work,  which  might  more  strictly  be  termed  "  plaiting." 

It  is  best  to  teach  each  exercise  with  strips  of  different 
colours,  so  that  a  definite  command  may  be  given  for  the 
weaving  of  each  strip. 

The  paper  used  must  be  moderately  stiff,  and  for  pre- 
liminary work  any  used  foolscap  or  drawing  paper  will  do 
for  the  purpose.  The  children  might  learn  (1)  to  cut  strips 
of  paper  about  two  inches  wide ;  (2)  fold  in  half ;  (3)  open, 
turn  the  edges  to  centre  crease ;  (4)  fold  edges  inside,  thus 
giving  strips  J  inch  wide  with  straight  folded  edges,  which 
are  necessary  for  the  evenness  of  the  work. 

For  examination  work,  the  coloured  strips  used  for  free 
weaving,  and  sold  in  packets  at  6d.  per  packet,  are  best. 

Materials  required. — Long  strips  of  paper  of  same 
width,  and  three  or  more  drawing  pins,  and  a  mill-board, 
if  possible. 

Method  for  « Plait  of  Three."— Supply  each  child  with 
three  coloured  strips,  three  drawing  pins,  and  a  mill-board. 
If  the  latter  cannot  be  had,  the  desk  must  be  used.  Place 
the  strips  vertically  side  by  side,  and  fix  in  position  with 


54 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


drawing  pins.  Write  pattern  on  blackboard  thus — "  Out- 
side strip  over  the  centre  one,  first  from  the  right  hand, 
and  then  from  the  left.  Crease  the  fold  at  side  straight 
and  even."  Before  writing  the  above,  the  teacher  should 
plait  the  pattern  on  a  large  scale  before  the  children,  and 
let  them  describe  what  she  does,  and,  when  understood, 
write  in  words  the  pattern  on  blackboard.  The  children 
then  to  work  icith  the  teacher  and 
repeat  the  pattern  aloud  for  the  first 
few  exercises.  They  will  soon  perceive 
that  the  strips  resolve  themselves  into 
two  oblique  on  the  right,  then  two 
oblique  on  the  left.  The  plait  is 
the  common  plait  of  three,  creasing  the 
sides  as  each  strip  is  turned  over. 

It  is  very  pretty  woven  in  different 
colours,  and  can  be  sewn  together  to 
form  tidies,  mats,  bags,  picture  frames, 
etc. 

Plait  of  Four. — Pattern  "under  one 
and  over  two,"  working  first  from 
right  hand,  then  from  left.  The  edges 
are  mitred,  or  made  of  two  angles  of 
45°  produced  by  two  strips  folded  back 
upon  each  other.  This  part  is  the  only 
difficulty  of  the  pattern,  and  should  be 
practised  with  two  strips  several  times 
before  attempting  the  plait.  Give  each  child  four  strips  of 
different  colours,  1,  2,  3,  4,  or  four  strips  of  two  colours ; 
1  and  3  must  be  alike,  and  2  and  4  alike. 

1.  Take  strips  1  and  2 ;  place  No.  1  across  No.  2 
obliquely,  as  in  Fig.  51,  and  crease  it  back  upon  No.  2. 
Then  crease  No.  2  back  in  same  manner  upon  No.  1.  This 


FIG.  50. 


PAPER-PLAITING  55 

is  the  vandyke  edge,  which  is  shown  on  each  side.  Practise 
this  vandyke  fold  with  two  strips  until  thoroughly  under- 
stood. Children  crease  and  fold  in  their  hands'. 

2.  When  step  No.  1  is  known,  introduce  strips  3  and  4, 
and  fasten  the  four  strips  to  desk  or  mill-board  with  two 
drawing  pins.  Arrange  the  two  strips  3  and  4  that  they 


FIG.  51. 

run  obliquely  right  and  left;  then  fix  on  strips  1   and  2 
with  drawing  pins. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  two  strips,  which  the  hori- 
zontal strip  crosses  each  time,  are  two  crossed  strips, 
running  obliquely  right  and  left.  The  pattern  is  very 
simple  when  the  vandyke  edge  is  known.  It  resolves  itself 
into — Under  one  and  vandyke — pass  over  two  straight  across  to 
other  side — under  one  and  vandyke — pass  lack  over  two. 


56  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

OXFORD  PICTURE  FRAME 

This  plait  when  made  in  brown  paper,  or  cream  and 
brown,  will  be  useful  to  transform  into  Oxford  frames,  in 
which  to  exhibit  other  specimens  of  the  children's  Kinder- 
garten work. 


Working  side.  FIG.  52.  Bight  side. 

Cut  four  strips  of  cardboard,  and  cross  the  corners  at 
right  angles,  leaving  2  inches  extending  each  way.  Secure 
the  corners,  and  make  frame  complete.  Fasten  on  strips 
of  the  plait,  and  let  the  Vandyke  points  extend  on  either 
side  beyond  the  cardboard  foundation.  Tie  ribbons 
diagonally  across  the  corners,  and  finish  wjth  a  bow  of 
ribbon  for  suspending  the  frame. 

NEWSPAPER  BAG 

The  columns  of  a  newspaper  are  suitable  for  this  plait. 
Let  the  children  cut  up  the  columns,  fold  column  in  half, 


PAPER- PL  A  7  TING 


57 


turn  edges  to  centre,  and  fold  again,  turning  edges  inside. 
Use  the  strips  for  plaiting  as  described.  Newspaper  bags 
for  fish  or  light  articles  may  be  made  of  these  strips. 
When  sufficient  plaits  have  been  produced  by  the  class, 
make  a  Holland  or  calico  case,  and  sew  the  strips  round  the 
bag  horizontally,  letting  each  successive  strip  overlap  the 
last  until  the  calico  case  is  covered.  Sew  on  two  wider 


FIG.  53.— Newspaper  Bag. 

strips,  fastened  to  a  strip  of  Holland,  for  the  handles,  and 
the  bag  is  ready  for  use.  This  bag,  when  finished,  has  the 
appearance  of  gray  silk,  and  if  lined  with  coloured  silk  to 
hide  the  calico  foundation,  might  be  used  for  fancy  work 
or  other  purposes. 

A  child  who  becomes  proficient  in  paper-plaiting  may 
easily  be  taught  straw-plaiting.  The  directions  given  being 
applicable  to  either. 


58  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


PAPER-FOLDING  AND  WEAVING 

LAMP  MAT 
This  is  a  very  handsome  and  useful  mat  for  the  centre 


FIG.  54.— Lamp  Mat. 


of  a  table,  and  is  made  of  folded  carton  paper,  a  tinted  kind 
of  cream  laid  sold  in  large  sheets. 


PAPER-FOLDING  AND   WE  A  VING  59 

Materials  required. — Give  to  each  child  a  strip 

of  paper  2J  inches  wide  and  12  inches  long.  A  pair  of 
paper  scissors,  with  rounded  points  and  two  paper  clips,  as 
described  in  Straw  Weaving. 

Preparation. — Before  allowing  the  children  to  start 
cutting  the  carton  paper,  it  is  best  to  give  them  a  little 
practice  in  cutting  and  folding  strips  of  newspaper.  There- 
fore, for  this  purpose,  cut  a  number  of  newspapers  into  J 
sheets  and  distribute  one  piece  to  each  child.  Let  all  the 
class  cut  off  the  border  close  to  the  print  and  leave  only  the 
columns  intact.  Show  what  is  meant  by  a  column  and  let 
class  cut  up  the  first  line  of  division.  The  scissors  must  be 
held  firmly  in  the  right  hand,  with  the  thumb  in  one  bow, 
and  the  second  and  third  fingers  in  the  other.  The  first 
finger  must  go  under  the  shank  to  guide  the  points.  The 
scissors'  hand  must  be  kept  steady  when  cutting,  and  long, 
bold  strokes  should  be  made,  otherwise  the  paper  edges  will 
present  a  very  jagged  appearance.  Teacher  to  illustrate 
before  class. 

The  strips  are  next  folded  simultaneously  with  the 
teacher  as  follows  :  — 

(1)  Show  strips  holding  short  ends  in  either  hand. 

(2)  Lay  lengthways  on  the  desk. 

(3)  Fold  in  half,  lengthways,  and  make  a  centre  crease. 

(4)  Open  papers  and  fold  edges  to  centre  crease. 

(5)  Fold  together  the  edges  inside. 

Do  not  pass  careless  folding.  Let  the  children  open  and 
smooth  their  papers  and  crease  again  till  the  work  is 
accurate.  The  strips  should  be  quite  even,  rather  more 
than  half  an  inch  wide,  and  both  sides  alike.  Each  child 
should  keep  its  own  folded  strips  until  there  are  sufficient 
for  a  mat. 

Weaving. — Give  each  child  two  paper  clips,  and  let  each 


60  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

one  interlace  the  folded  strips  into  the  two  clips  at  once, 
one  over  and  one  under.  When  the  clips  are  full,  gradually 
separate  them,  drawing  them  to  the  top  and  bottom  (see 
Fig.  Ill  " Straw  plait  clip '). 

This  stage  represents  the  mat,  and  the  strips  should  be 
of  one  colour.  A  similar  number  of  horizontal  strips  of  a 
contrasting  colour  are  now  woven  across  until  a  12-inch 
square  of  even  weaving  is  produced.  Care  should  be  taken 
that  the  strips  are  placed  the  same  way,  i.e.  with  the  double 
edges  all  running  right  or  left.  The  mat  in  illustration  is 
made  up  of  terra  cotta  and  pale  yellow  carton  paper.  Both 
sides  of  the  weaving  should  be  equally  good,  and  the  under 
side  untouched  by  the  hands  should  be  used  for  the  right  side. 

Mounting. — Cut  a  14-inch  square  of  stout  cardboard  and 
paste  square  of  weaving  exactly  in  the  centre,  which  will 
leave  a  margin  of  cardboard  1  inch  all  round.  Place  a 
heavy  weight  upon  the  top  and  leave  to  flatten  and  dry. 

Fringe. — If  a  narrow  fringe  be  required  the  same  strips 
will  do,  but  for  a  handsome  fringe  the  strips  need  to  be  cut  4 
inches  wide.  Take  two  strips,  one  of  each  colour,  and  place 
together  and  fold  as  before.  Turn  down  a  narrow  hem  on 
the  single  fold  side  and  make  a  crease.  Lift  up  the  hem 
and  cut  the  double  folds  very  finely  as  far  as  the  crease. 
Rub  with  the  hand  and  crumple.  These  strips  of  fringe 
are  12  inches  long,  and  the  cardboard  foundation  14  inches. 
Take  one  strip  at  a  time  and  gum  to  the  edge  of  cardboard 
all  round,  leaving  one  square  inch  at  each  corner.  These 
are  better  filled  in  last.  Continue  to  gum  strips  round  and 
round  till  the  weaving  is  reached  and  the  edges  covered. 
The  fringe  should  stand  up  handsomely,  and  the  cuts  well 
separated  to  show  the  two  colours.  When  the  border  is 
complete,  take  a  strip,  fold  it  many  times  and  fix  in  each 
corner,  to  give  a  full  and  finished  appearance. 


PAPER-FOLDING  AND   WE  A  VING  61 

TOILET  TIDY 

Materials  required. — (1)  Tissue  or  carton  paper  (two 
colours). 


FIG.  55.— Toilet  Tidy. 

(2)  Paper  scissors  with  round  points. 


62 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


(3)  Two  paper  clips. 

Method. — Cut  paper  in  strips  and  fold  as  directed  in 
previous  lesson.  The  strips  may  be  wide  or  narrow,  or 
both,  as  desired. 

These  squares  of  weaving  may  be  utilised  for  pockets, 
tidies,  etc.  If  the  carton  paper  be  used,  it  would  be  stiff 
and  need  no  mounting,  but  the  tissue  will  require  a  firm 
foundation.  The  pocket  in  illustration  is  made  from  an 
exact  square  of  weaving,  of  12  inches.  Two  adjoining 
sides  of  the  square  are  sewn  together,  and  then  covered 

with  a  strip  of  fringe, 
gummed  on  either  side, 
and  the  point  finished 
with  a  cut  tassel.  Two 
strips  of  fringe  are  sewn 
round  the  top,  on  the 
outside,  and  another 
strip  is  gummed  round 
the  inside  to  hide  the 
stitches.  A  loop  of 
coloured  ribbon  is  at- 
tached to  the  sides  to 
suspend  the  pocket. 
These  pockets  should 
be  made  in  pairs,  and 
are  then  suitable  to  hang 
either  side  of  the  toilet 
glass,  as  hair  tidies. 
Square  envelope  pocket  is  another  good  shape  to  make 
from  an  exact  square. 

Any  fancy  shape  may  be  made  by  mounting  the  weaving 
and  cutting  to  shape.  Then  bind  with  ribbon  and  ornament 
with  fringe. 


FIG.  56. 


WE  A  VING  IN  RIBBON 


WEAVING  IN  RIBBON 

The  articles  illustrated  show  simple  mat  weaving  with 
narrow  ribbon. 

The  ribbon  used  must  have  a  plain  woven  edge.     The 


best  for  the  purpose  is  plain  sarcenet  and  satin  ribbon  at 
lOJd.  per  dozen  yards,  which  can  be  procured  in  all  colours. 
A  wooden  frame  is  needed  for  straining  the  work.  The 
ordinary  slate  frame  answers  the  purpose  for  making  small 
pieces  of  work,  and  if  larger  be  necessary,  a  rough  frame 
can  easily  be  made  from  cardboard  or  the  long  sides  of  two 


64 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


slates.  Pegs  or  nails  are  inserted  top  and  bottom  of  the 
slate,  leaving  a  distance  between  each  equal  to  the  width 
of  the  ribbon. 

Tie  the  ribbon  round  first  peg  and  proceed  across  the 
slate  to  opposite  peg.  Pass  across  and  round  the  next  and 
so  continue  till  the  slate  is  full ;  see  that  the  ribbon  lies 
flat  and  close  and  vertical.  Finish  again  by  tying  the  end 
round  last  nail.  This  stage  represents  the  tight  mat.  The 
cross  weaving  is  done  in  another  colour,  and  the  ribbon  is 
cut  in  lengths  and  woven  with  the  ordinary  plaiting  needle. 
Each  strip  is  placed  quite  flat  and  close  to  the  last.  Any 
pattern  may  be  woven.  When  a  piece  is  plaited  of  the 
size  required,  the  teacher  should  see  that  it  is  accurate, 
and  with  needle  and  cotton  tack  round  the  outer  edges 
before  removing  the  work  from  the  frame.  To  do  this,  cut 

the  loop  ends  on  the 
pegs,  and  lift  the 
whole  off  the  frame. 
The  piece  of  weav- 
ing may  then  be  put 
to  one  of  the  follow- 
ing uses : — 

1 .  Pin  -  cushion.  — 
Weave  a  piece  of  work 
upon  ordinary  slate 
frame  6  inches  square,, 
according  to  the 
directions  given. 
Make  also  a  calico  case 
of  the  same  size,  let 
children  sew  the  edges  and  fill  with  bran  or  frayings.  The 
outer  case  of  cushion  is  made  of  silk,  sateen,  or  velveteen  for 
the  under  side,  and  the  plaited  top  for  the  upper  side. 


^ . 


FIG.  58.— Piu-cushion. 


IVEA  VI NG  IN  RIBBON  65 

Turn  down  the  cut  edges  to  the  weaving  and  sew  the 
plaited  top  to  the  square  for  under  side.  Let  the  children 
sew  this  case  on  the  wrong  side,  holding  the  woven  side 
towards  them.  Use  silk  or  twist  of  same  shade ;  when 
finished,  turn  case,  press  open  seams,  and  slip  cushion 
inside  and  sew  up.  Pull  corners  well  out  and  shape  the 
cushion.  Finish  the  join  with  a  narrow  silk  cord  of  same 


FIG.  59.— Handkerchief  Sachet. 

colour  as  ribbon.  This  must  be  sewn  on  by  the  teacher. 
The  colours  used  in  this  cushion  are  white  and  yellow, 
with  yellow  cord.  The  corners  may  be  ornamented  with 
lace  if  desired. 

2.  Handkerchief  Sachet. — Weave  an  oblong  piece,  6x10 
inches,  in  terra  cotta  and  pale  blue  ribbons,  and  turn  down 
the  edges  as  directed  for  cushion.  For  the  lining  cut  a  strip 
of  pale  blue  sateen,  8x12  inches,  and  a  strip  of  wadding, 
and  quilt  together  to  the  size  of  6  X  10  inches.  The  quilting 

F 


66  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

may  be  run  by  hand  in  sewing  silk  or  by  machine.  The 
quilted  satin  sold  by  the  yard  is  very  nice  for  making 
up  this  work.  Tack  the  plaited  piece  to  it,  wrong  side, 
and  let  the  child  sew  round  three  sides.  Turn  the  work 
and  fasten  up  the  open  side.  Finish  round  the  edge  with 
a  silk  cord,  and  fasten  together  with  bow  and  ends  of 
ribbon. 

A  large  square  of  10  or  12  inches  will  make  a  hand- 
kerchief sachet,  with  the  four  points  folded  to  the  centre 
and  fastened  with  ribbon.  This  shape  is  also  nice  quilted, 
and  if  filled  with  sachet-powdered  scent  between  the  lining 
makes  a  very  pretty  and  desirable  present,  and  an  article 
appreciated  by  the  parents.  The  teacher's  time  is  better 
spent  in  finishing  off  a  really  useful  article  than  in  making 
up  paper  weaving  articles  which  are  unsaleable  and  take  as 
much  time  to  complete. 

FOLDED  SATIN  SOFA  CUSHION 

Materials  required.  —  (1)  J  yard  of  pale  green  satin 
at  Is.  OJd.  a  yard. 

(2)  \  yard  of  old  gold  satin  at  Is.  Ojd.  a  yard. 

(3)  \\  yards  of  silk  cord  at  Id.  a  yard. 

(4)  A  strip  of  unbleached  calico  for  case, 

(5)  Bran  or  wool  for  stuffing. 

(6)  Reel  of  green  silk. 

Method. — Children  who  have  already  had  paper-folding 
and  cutting,  and  are  proficient  in  making  mats  and  tidies, 
might  be  allowed  to  start  upon  this  pretty  and  useful  article, 
which  is  inexpensive  and  yet  very  simply  made.  The 
satin  must  be  cut  in  strips  the  selvedge  way,  2  inches  wide 
and  \  yard  long.  The  satin  will  fold  as  easily  as  paper, 
if  cut  the  way  of  the  selvedge.  Each  strip  is  folded  exactly 


WE  A  VING  IN  RIBBON  67 

as  directed  in  paper  mat,  i.e.  first,  lengthways  in  half  and 
crease,  open  and  fold  edges  to  crease,  and  fold  strip  with 
edges  inside.  Children  should  be  provided  with  a  bone 
flattener,  used  for  rubbing  seams,  and  with  this  the  creases 
should  be  made.  The  strip  when  folded  has  both  sides 
alike — no  edges  visible — J  yard  long  and  J  inch  wide. 
There  will  be  no  fear  of  the  work  becoming  untidy  or 
fraying  if  folded  as  directed.  The  work  can  be  turned 
when  worn  or  faded  and  used  again.  Cut  a  square  of 


FIG.  60.— Folded  Satin  Sofa  Cushion. 

brown  paper,  9x9  inches,  and  let  the  child  pin  the 
green  strips  top  and  bottom  of  the  square  to  form  the  mat. 
See  that  the  folded  edges  all  run  the  same  way  when 
fixing.  The  child  must  now  interlace  the  golden  strips, 
and  must  be  careful  to  pass  them  in  with  the  double 
edges  downwards,  and  smooth  and  push  them  up  close  each 
time.  The  piece  when  finished  looks  very  beautiful,  like 
most  exact  patchwork  of  alternate  coloured  squares.  The 
fourfold  satin  gives  each  square  a  raised  appearance  as  if 
padded.  When  finished  the  teacher  must  tack  the  edges 


68  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

together  and  then  turn  down  about  half  an  inch  all  round. 
Tack  the  square  of  weaving  to  a  plain  square  of  satin  of  same 
size,  ready  for  sewing.  The  sewing  must  be  done  on  the 
wrong  side,  and  with  silk  of  same  colour.  The  inner  cushion 
is  made  of  unbleached  calico,  and  filled  with  bran.  Slip  the 
cushion  inside  of  case  and  sew  up.  As  far  as  this  point 
every  part  can  be  done  by  a  girl  of  seven  years.  The 
cushion  is  finished  off  by  sewing  over  the  seam  a  fine  silk 
cord  with  a  twist  or  two  of  the  same  at  each  corner.  Large 
sofa  cushions,  as  Fig.  60,  may  be  made  in  a  similar  way  and 
filled  with  frayings  from  the  babies'  room,  or  handkerchief 
sachets  and  night-dress  cases  may  be  made  of  oblong  pieces 
of  the  same  kind  of  weaving. 


STRING  WEAVING 

Teachers  in  want  of  a  pretty  and  useful  occupation  will 
be  pleased  with  string  weaving,  which  the  writer  has  adapted 
as  a  supplementary  course  to  the  ordinary  mat-plaiting,  to 
take  the  place  of  Mat  V.,  which  is  discontinued  upon  the 
London  School  Board  requisition. 

In  every  large  school  there  will  of  necessity  accumulate 
a  number  of  cracked  and  useless  slates,  which  may  be  used 
for  this  new  occupation. 

Materials  required.— 1.  Slate  frame. 

2.  Macrame  string. 

3.  Weaving  needle. 

4.  French  nails  of  1  inch. 

Preparation. — Break  away  the  slate  part  of  the  useless 
slates,  and  clean  frames.  These  may  be  washed  in  hot  soda 
water,  or,  better  still,  cleaned  with  a  small  piece  of  sand- 


STRING  WEAVING  69 

paper.  Either  method  can  be  performed  by  the  Standard 
or  upper  infant  boys,  and  be  thoroughly  enjoyed,  and  form 
an  exciting  occupation  for  one  afternoon.  This  done,  write 
each  child's  name  on  a  label  and  attach  to  slate. 

Mark  the  top  and  bottom  of  frame  into  distances  of 
half  an  inch,  and  at  each  mark  insert  a  short  French 
nail. 

Winding. — Take  double  string  of  either  the  same  or 
different  colours,  tie  to  first  nail  at  the  bottom  of  frame,  and 
wind  up  and  down  the  frame,  keeping  the  strands  vertical 
(see  Fig.  61)  until  all  the  nails  are  used.  In  winding 
these  foundation  strands  it  is  necessary  to  pull  the  first 
and  last  strands  as  tight  as  possible. 

Weaving. — Measure  off  lengths  of  string  of  another  colour 
for  the  cross-weaving.  This  is  best  done  by  winding  round 
an  empty  slate  frame,  and  cutting  the  string  once  only. 
Each  strand  is  doubled  in  half,  and  the  loop  end  inserted 
in  the  weaving  needle.  Any  pattern  can  be  woven,  the 
same  as  in  mat-plaiting,  but  few  look  better  than  the  simple 
one  of  2  up  and  2  down.  The  first  exercises  may  be 
woven  with  common  twine,  which  really  looks  very  subdued 
in  tone,  and  can  be  used  plain  as  it  is,  or  may  be  embroidered 
in  wool,  by  working  a  simple  spray  of  flowers  or  a  geometrical 
design  in  cross-stitch  upon  the  plaiting,  before  it  is  removed 
from  the  frame. 

Materials. — Method  of  Lesson. — Distribute  one  frame  to 
each  child,  a  weaving  needle,  and  six  lengths  of  string,  cut 
as  above  directed,  twice  the  width  of  the  frame. 

1.  Lay  slates  in  position  with  knot  at  bottom  left-hand 
corner.  Question  upon  colour  of  string,  whether  primary 
or  secondary  colours,  etc.  Count  strands  in  "ones'7  and 
"twos."  Compare  with  tight  strands  of  a  mat.  Teacher 
to  demonstrate  on  similar  slate. 


70  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

2.  Show  loose  strand  of  string.     Name  colour.     Take  an 
end  in  either  hand.     Double  in  half. 

3.  Show  needles.     Press   spring   with   left   finger    and 
thumb.     Insert  loop  of  string  with  right  hand. 

These  exercises  should  be  done  simultaneously  with  the 
teacher. 

Weave  across  from  right  to  left,  unthreading  the  needle 


FIG.  61.  —Slate  Frame. 


at  the  other  side.  The  two  strings  must  be  made  to  lie 
together,  quite  flat,  and  not  twisted  anywhere.  See  that 
this  point  is  attended  to  in  every  row.  The  weaving  must 
be  done  very  evenly,  and  each  horizontal  row  must  be  at 
an  equal  distance  from  the  one  above. 

How  to  Finish. — The  whole  of  the  weaving  being  done, 
the  work  has  to  be  fixed  before  removing  it  from  the  frame. 
Examine  the  plaiting  and  see  that  the  strings  are  not 
twisted  or  uneven,  and  if  satisfactory,  i.e.  tight,  regular, 


STRING  WEAVING 


and  even,  paste  or  gum  over  the  whole  of  one  side  whilst 

still  on  the  frame,  and  leave  to  dry.     It  is  best  to  gum  the 

side   which   has  been   uppermost,    because  the 

under  side  of  the  work  will  be  found  fresh  and 

clean,  having  been  kept  free  from  the  children's 

hands. 

Plait  of  String. — Take  six  or  nine  strands  of 
string ;  knot  them  together  at  one  end,  and  let 
one  child  hold  the  knot  whilst  another  plaits 
three  at  a  time,  in  the  ordinary  plait  of  three. 

The  plait  must  be  fixed  on  the  article  by 
an  infant  teacher,  and  small  bows  of  ribbon 
attached  to  hide  any  unsightly  joins  of  the 
plait. 

TOILET  TIDY 

Materials. — Haw  to  Utilise. — The  tidy  con- 
sists of  :  (1)  Two  pieces,  back  aiid  front.  (2) 

Colours,  brown  and 
pink  strings. 

Plait  of  brown  string  made 
according  to  directions  given 
above.  (4)  Bows  of  pink  ribbon. 
Cut  out  in  stout  cardboard 
the  shape  of  the  article  to 
be  made.  Snip  the  looped 
strings  at  each  nail,  and 
remove  the  work  from  the 
frame.  Place  the  cardboard 
pattern  upon  the  weaving, 
and  gum  or  tack  it  firmly  to 
the  work,  and  cut  to  shape. 
FIG.  63.— Toilet  Tidy.  Cover  the  under  side  with  silk, 


.    FIG.  62.— Plait 
(3)       of  String. 


72  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

sateen,  or  leather  paper,  and  bind  the  edges  with  ribbon, 
and  ornament  with  a  plait  of  string  to  hide  the  stitches. 
The  work  may  be  rendered  much  more  attractive  by 
using  a  variety  of  colours,  and  it  forms  a  splendid  exercise 
for  teaching  combination  of  the  same.  The  work  is  useful 
in  many  ways,  as  it  forms  a  suitable  supplement  to  the 
ordinary  mat -weaving  occupation,  and  can  be  mounted 
and  cut  to  any  shape  for  manipulation  into  table  mats, 
toilet  tidies,  etc. 

If  large  pieces  of  work  are  required,  they  can  be  made 
upon  an  old  picture  frame,  or  a  rough  one  could  easily  be 
made  of  four  strips  of  cardboard,  but  a  number  of  slate 
frames  will  be  found  best  for  use  in  large  classes. 


A  EOUND  MAT 

Very  pretty  round  mats  for  vases  and  ornaments  can  be 
made  from  the  piece  woven  on  an  ordinary  slate  frame. 
To  finish  these  off,  an  ornamental  loop  fringe  is  easily 
made  in  the  following  way  : — 

1.  Give  each  child  a  wooden  12  or  6  inch  flat  ruler  as 
used  in  the  school,  and  a  small  loll  of  string. 

2.  Tie  the  end  of  string  tightly  round  the  ruler. 

3.  Hold  ruler  in 
left  hand,  and  with 
ball  in  the  right, 
teach  simple  button- 
hole stitch. 

When  the   ruler  is 

FlG-64-  full,    the    teacher    or 

child  should  oversew  the  buttonhole  edge  with  a  needle 
and  thread  to  secure  the  loops  from  untying.  This  done, 
slip  the  loops  off  the  ruler  from  time  to  time,  and  knot 


STRING  WEAVING 


73 


on  more  string  and  continue  the  fringe  until  the  piece  is 
of  the  required  length  for  mat. 


FIG.  65.— Round  String  Mat. 

Sew  the  fringe  round  on  the  extreme  edge,  arid  finish 
with  a  plait  as  described  above,  and  bows  of  ribbons. 

Wool  may  be  used 
instead  of  string,  and 
the  finer  the  string 
the  more  delicate  and 
beautiful  wilt  be  the 
weaving. 

The  Macrame  string  FlG-  66.— Fringe  complete. 

may  be  had  in  all  shades  and  of  three  different  sizes. 


STRING  WEAVING  75 


WEAVING  FRAME 

The  frame  in  Fig.  67  is  called  a  weaving  frame.  It 
is  made  of  wood  and  measures  19x12  inches.  The  long 
sides  are  intersected  with  thirty-eight  fine  points,  upon 
which  the  materials  are  fixed  or  wound.  The  frame  is 
made  for  list  weaving,  but  may  be  used  equally  well  for 
straw  plait  or  ribbons,  or  wound  with  string  or  cane  to 
represent  in  each  case  a  flat  mat  for  weaving.  The  points 
are  covered  by  strips  of  cork  when  weaving. 

In  string  weaving  the  ordinary  Kindergarten  needle  is 
useful  for  the  purpose.  The  string  should  be  doubled  in 
half  and  the  loop  end  fixed  in  the  needle,  and  thus  a  double 
row  is  worked  each  time.  The  long  demonstration  needles 
of  12  inches,  supplied  with  the  "Paragon  Sewing  Sheets," 
are  also  very  good  to  use  upon  this  frame.  The  string  then 
would  have  to  be  used  singly,  but  the  string  might  be  cut 
a  sufficient  length  to  work  three  or  four  rows  without 
joining. 


STRING  HANDBAG 
Materials  required.— 1.  Macrame  string,  No.  4. 

2.  Weaving  needle. 

3.  Weaving  frame. 

Method. — If  a  weaving  frame  is  not  to  be  had  the 
teacher  might  make  one  by  nailing  four  pieces  of  wood 
together  and  using  short  French  nails  for  the  points.  This 
done,  wind  the  string  up  and  down  on  the  points,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  67.  Then  with  Kindergarten  plaiting  needle 
or  long  demonstration  needle  weave  across  the  frame  in  the 
same  or  a  different  coloured  string.  When  a  piece  the  full 
size  of  the  frame,  18  X  12  inches,  has  been  woven,  then  lay 


76  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

across  one  end  a  simple  outline  of  flowers.  This  pattern 
must  be  traced  on  paper  and  the  paper  tacked  upon  the 
weaving.  With  wool  and  needle  the  pattern  is  •  covered 
with  long  stitches.  In  Fig.  68  the  pattern  is  a 
spray  of  leaves  and  blue  flowers.  The  stem  and  stalks 
are  sewn  in  brown  wool,  the  flowers  in  blue,  and  the  leaves 
in  different  shades  of  green. 

The  under  side  of  the  work  is  now  pasted  over  with 


FIG.  68.— String  Handbag. 

thin  paste  to  keep  the  weaving  intact  before  being  removed 
from  the  frame.  Slip  the  work  over  the  points  and  tack 
the  same  to  a  piece  of  stout  canvas  for  support.  Edge  it 
all  round  with  a  plait  of  string,  as  shown  in  Fig.  68. 
The  piece  of  work  is  now  doubled  in  half  to  form  a  bag, 
and  is  lined  with  a  full  lining  of  blue  sateen  to  match  the 
shade  of  the  flowers.  The  gathered  sides  have  a  running 
of  elastic  to  allow  them  to  stretch  open.  Two  handles  of 
plaited  string  are  attached  to  the  sides. 


DIAGONAL   WEAVING  77 


DIAGONAL  WEAVING 

This  occupation  is  a  very  suitable  one  to  supplement 
diagonal  mat-plaiting,  because  the  principle  is  the  same,  and 
the  children  will  be  able  to  proceed  without  much  assistance 
from  the  teacher  after  one  or  two  lessons.  It  may  be 
utilised  for  making  many  useful  articles  in  addition  to  its 
educational  advantages. 

Materials  required. — 1.  Old  slate  frames  with  holes 
drilled  three-quarters  of  an  inch  apart  on  each  side  of  four 
corner  holes. 

2.  A   small  wooden  pegger,  or  wooden  signal  reading 
pointer,  as  used  by  the  children. 

3.  Macrame  string  of  different  colours,  No.  5. 
Method    Of   Teaching". — Have   all   the   slate  frames 

cleaned  and  uniformly  drilled  with  quarter  of  an  inch 
holes  on  all  sides  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch  apart, 
making  the  corner  holes  first. 

This  done,  label  each  slate  with  child's  name  and  dis- 
tribute to  class,  with  a  pegger  or  reading  pointer.  If 
reading  pointers  are  not  used  in  the  school,  the  teacher 
should  use  firewood,  and  sharpen  a  3-inch  stick  for  each 
child.  It  must  fit  into  the  holes  of  slate,  and  will  be  used 
as  a  wedge  to  prevent  the  string  from  slipping  as  the 
weaving  proceeds. 

Beginning. — Pass  the  thread  down  into  No.  1  hole,  and 
tie  the  string  to  the  inner  side  of  the  slate  frame.  Pass 
across  to  No.  2  hole  opposite  and  thread  down  No.  2  and 
up  through  No.  3.  Pass  across  to  No.  4,  and  thread  down 
and  up  on  opposite  side.  Continue  thus  till  side  of  the 
slate  is  full. 

The  threading  is  carried  on   on  one  side  of   the  slate 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


only ;  the  children  will  soon  perceive  that  the  rule  for 
threading  is  "  down  and  up "  on  one  side  of  slate,  cross 
over,  and  repeat  on  the  opposite  side.  When  all  holes  are 
threaded,  pull  the  string  tightly,  and  secure  the  end  for  the 
present  by  winding  it  round  the  adjoining  side  of  frame. 

Turn  slate  round,  i.e.  top  to  bottom,  and  let  the  last 
threaded  hole  come  at  bottom  left-hand  corner. 

Begin  again  in  this  hole,  and.  proceed  again  exactly  as 

2.    3. 


f 


FIG.  69. 

before.  Tie  on  a  second  string,  and  weave  into  the  same 
holes  until  a  double  string  proceeds  from  every  hole. 

The  two  ends  will  be  on  opposite  sides  of  the  slates,  and 
both  these  should  be  of  same  colour,  e.g.  red. 

The  cross  strings  must  be  of  a  different  colour,  and  may 
be  green. 

Knot  to  each  end  of  red  a  green  string  sufficient  to 
weave  throughout  the  several  lengths  of  the  slate.  The 
knot  must  be  made  to  come  underneath  the  frame,  and  will 
lie  across  the  corner  hole.  The  new  colour  is  threaded  up 


DIAGONAL   WEAVING 


79 


on  either  side  through  the  hole  next  to  the  corner.  The 
right-hand  thread  is  woven  across,  1  up,  1  down,  to  the 
opposite  side,  and  threaded  down  into  the  same  hole  from 
which  the  opposite  thread  proceeds.  The  left-hand  thread 
is  next  woven  across  from  left  to  right,  reversing  the 
weaving  of  the  right-hand  thread,  and  the  end  is  threaded 
down  into  the  same  hole  as  the  first  cross  strand.  Both  are 
pulled  tightly  and  one  side  is  pegged,  whilst  the  other  is 
worked.  Both  ends  are  next  threaded  from  underneath  up 


FIG.  70. 

through  the  second  hole  on  each  side.  They  are  both 
woven  across  as  before,  and  passed  down  into  same  holes, 
pegged,  etc.,  until  the  sides  of  slate  are  complete. 

Diagonals. — Knot  to  each  end  of  the  green  string  a  pale 
yellow  or  cream  thread.  If  the  holes  are  to  be  secured 
with  wooden  pegs,  the  diagonal  strings  could  be  cut  in 
lengths,  but  a  long  string  can  be  used  and  threaded  from 
hole  to  hole  in  the  same  way  as  the  first  two  colours. 

Place  the  slates  lengthways,  with  the  red  strings  vertical 
and  the  green  horizontal. 

Give  the  rule  that  the  weaving  is  to  be  in  a  slanting 


So 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


direction,  and  the  double  red  strings  are  each  time  to  be 
"  lifted  up,"  beginning  at  the  corner.  As  the  slates  are  not 
square,  the  first  diagonal  will  come  out  on  the  top  side  of 
the  slate,  and  not  in  the  opposite  corner.  Thread  the 
string,  down  and  up,  through  next  hole  and  continue  back 
again  across,  "  lifting  up  "  the  double  red  thread  till  all  the 
diagonals  are  done  one  way. 

The  corner  holes  are  used  for  the  diagonal  strings  only. 


FIG.  71. 

Second  Diagonal. — Turn  slates  round  with  the  double 
green  strands  vertical,  arid  proceed  with  the  second  diagonal 
in  precisely  the  same  way  as  the  first,  viz.  "  lifting  up  "  the 
double  green  strands.  The  weaving,  although  the  same  to 
the  children,  is  exactly  the  reverse  of  the  first  diagonal, 
and  is  thus  managed  by  simply  turning  the  slates,  sides  to 
bottom.  The  different  colours  used  for  each  weaving  is 
one  great  aid,  and  the  one  rule  of  "lifting  up"  the  verticals 
when  crossing  the  diagonals  is  another. 

The   diagonal  strings  must  not   touch  each  other,  but 


DIAGONAL   WEAVING 


Si 


must  cross  one  over  and  one  under  upon  all  the  double  red 
and  double  green  strands.  These  double  strands  must  not 
be  separated  in  the  diagonal  weaving,  but  treated  as  one. 


Finish  the  ends  by  pegging  them  tightly  with  wooden 
pegs  into  the  last  holes  threaded  down. 

Note. — Any  chair-seat,  window  blind,  or  stool  may  be  admir- 
ably worked  in  string  by  the  children,  and  will  be  found  quite 
as  durable  as  cane.  See  "  How  to  Cane  a  Chair,"  and  follow 
the  same  plan,  using  Macrame  string  instead  of  cane. 


DOLL'S  BEDSTEAD 

The  doll's  bedstead  is  made  of  ordinary  cotton  reels  and 
a  slate  frame. 

Wash  frame  and  reels  thoroughly  in  soda  water,  and, 
G 


82  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

when  dry,  let  child  enamel  all  in  post-office  red  paint 
enamel. 

Weave  centre  in  string  or  cane  according  to  the  direc- 
tions given  above. 

Push  a  round  stick  through  the  corner  holes,  allowing 
one-third  for  the  legs  and  two-thirds  for  the  height.  Gum 


FIG.  73.— Doll's  Bedstead. 

or  glue  the  reels  together.  Thread  them  on  the  sticks  and 
let  the  sticks  protrude  from  top  reels  about  three-quarters 
of  an  inch.  Slit  each  end,  and  into  the  slits  fasten  the 
transverse  rod  of  reels  to  form  the  head  of  bedstead. 

The  bedstead  may  be  frilled  and  trimmed  complete  by 
the  children  in  the  various  occupations. 

The  whole  was  made  by  a  boy  of  seven  years  in  writer's 
school. 


FRAME  WEAVING  83 


FRAME  WEAVING 

No.  I. 

Frame  weaving  is  really  advanced  "  Star  Winding," 
only  that  the  designs  have  more  angles,  and  are  larger  and 
require  greater  thought  and  manipulation.  The  small  stars 
are  made  of  ordinary  cardboard,  and  are  easily  wound  in 


FIG.  74. 

the  hand,  whereas  "  frame  weaving "  treats  of  a  stout  and 
substantial  foundation,  enabling  the  worker  to  pull  and 
strain  without  injuring  the  shape.  These  frames  are  really 
works  of  art  when  woven  in  Strutt's  fine  Macrame  twines 
or  crochet  cottons.  They  are  most  suitable  as  frames  for 
pictures,  but  may  be  utilised  for  lamp  mats,  key  racks,  etc., 
by  substituting  a  piece  of  velveteen  or  plush  for  the 
centre  instead  of  a  picture. 

Messrs.    Strutt    manufacture  forty-two    different  sizes, 


84 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


of  ten  distinct  shapes  of  frames,  some  of  which  are  furnished 
with  a  circular  mirror,  or  frame  for  cabinet  portrait. 

The  smallest  size  of  each  shape  begins  with  the  lowest 
number.     The  shapes  suitable  for  school  purposes  are — 

1.  The  Star  (sizes  1,  2,  3,  at  lOd.  to  2s.  per  dozen). 

2.  The  Sun  (sizes  4,  5,  6,  at  Is.  3d.  to  2s.  3d.  per  dozen).. 


J. 


FIG.  75. 


FIG.  76. 


3.  The   Circular  (sizes  7,  8,    9,  at   lOd.  to  2s.  8d.  per 
dozen). 

4.  The  Belper  (sizes  10  and  11,  at  Is.  Gd.  to  2s.  9d.  per 
dozen). 

Materials. — Strutt's  fine  twines,  No.  10,  or  Strutt's 
crochet  cottons  ;  both  are  manufactured  in  beautiful  artistic 
shades  and  sold  in  boxes  of  3  Ibs.  at  all  Kindergarten 
depots. 

Method  Of  Teaching1.— The  work  is  suitable  for  and 
quickly  understood  by  children  of  six  years  who  have 
previously  been  through  a  course  of  "  Star  Winding."  No.  1 


FRAME  WEAVING 


star  is    the  simplest   to  take  for  the   first  lesson,  as  the 

children    are   familiar  with   the 

shape. 

Examination  of  Frame. — First 
let  children  examine  the  star 
and  count  the  number  of  points 
and  angles. 

A  general  rule  for  winding 
is  to  divide  the  number  of  points 
by  four,  and  enclose  one  more 
than  the  dividend.  Thus,  a 
star  of  eight  points  divided  by 
four  would  give  two  add  one 
extra,  and  that  will  be  three 
points  to  be  taken  in  winding. 
Teach  children  this  simple  rule 
and  sketch  on  blackboard  the  Fl«-  ??• 

frame  in  question,  and  dot  off  the  section  to  be  enclosed 
in  the  winding. 


Choice  of  Colours. — A  centre  must  be  fixed  before  the 


86  VARIED  OCCUPA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VI NG 

winding  begins,  and  upon  the  centre  the  choice  of  colours 
must  depend.  At  first,  pretty  Christmas  cards  will  do  as 
centres,  but  later  on  portraits,  crayon  drawings,  embroidery 
and  crewel  work,  cut-out  sprays  of  flowers,  pressed  leaves, 
etc.,  might  be  prepared  in  the  different  classes,  and 
then  preserved  in  these  frames  by  placing  a  piece  of  glass 


FIG.  79. 

over  the  work.  Pierce  holes,  and  tie  the  glass  tightly  in 
position  until  the  weaving  is  done,  when  the  string  across 
the  glass  will  be  concealed  by  the  weaving,  and  will  hold 
the  centre  securely  in  position. 

Let  children  look  at  their  pictures,  and  decide  upon  the 
prominent  colours.  Whatever  they  may  be,  the  twine  or 
cotton  selected  should  harmonise  or  be  a  direct  contrast. 
Much  depends  upon  the  taste  displayed  in  choosing  the 
colours. 


FRAME   WEAVING 


No.  II. 
Materials  required.— 1.  Strutt's  fine  twine,  No.  10, 

or  Strutt's  crochet  cotton. 

2.  Frame  No.  1  of  the  star  shape. 


FIG.  80. — Picture  Frame. 

3.  Brass-headed  nails. 

4.  Picture  for  centre. 

5.  Large  brown  paper  bag,  with  name  affixed. 
Pattern. — Star    No.    1.     A  star  of  eight   equal   points, 

formed  by  a  square  placed  across  a  square.     Lead  children 


88  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

to  see  this,  and  dot  the  outline  of  the  two  separate  squares 
on  the  blackboard. 

Centre. — A  photograph  placed  under  a  square   of  glass 
and  tied  in  position  until  the  winding  is  finished.     Pierce 


FIG.  81. 

four  holes  through  the  foundation,  and  thread  the  string 
through  them  and  tie  at  back. 

Winding.— Push  a  small  brass -headed  nail  into  each 
point  to  keep  the  strings  from  slipping  off,  because  this 
pattern  begins  at  the  points  and  works  towards 
the  corner.  Tie  the  string  round  the  three  points, 
keeping  the  knot  at  the  back,  and  let  the  first 
row  lie  quite  at  the  edge  from  point  to  point. 
Wind  three  or  four  threads  on  this  section,  then 
turn  the  star  one  point  and  take  the  next  set  of 
FIG.  82.  three,  and  continue  to  wind  in  this  manner  all 
round  the  star.  One  colour  may  be  used  for  the  entire  frame, 
but  a  variety  is  very  effective.  This  is  managed  by  knotting 
on  a  different  colour  for  the  eight  different  sides.  The 
different  colour  used  must  be  wound  on  the  same  side  at 
each  successive  winding.  The  illustration  was  worked  in 
two  colours,  viz.  brown  and  pink,  and  the  alternate  colours 
were  used  each  time  the  star  was  turned,  giving  alternate 
corners  of  pink  and  brown.  After  the  star  has  been  wound 
all  round  (three  or  four  threads)  at  the  outer  edge  continue 
in  a  similar  way  round  the  star  again,  beginning  with  first 
colour,  and  let  all  successive  windings  lie  close  to  the  last, 
and  so  continue  until  the  rows  of  string  quite  fit  into  the 
corners,  and  the  star  points  are  completely  covered. 


FRAME   WEAVING 


89 


The  frequent  joining  of  the  colours  may  be  a  little 
troublesome,  but  if  the  children  have  a  knowledge  of  star- 
winding  and  are  taught  to  knot  their  own  strings  together, 
this  pattern  need  present  no  difficulty  if  each  child  is 
provided  with  the  necessary  balls  of  string  and  brown 


Fia.  83. 

paper  bag.     Finish  off  the  last  end  by  tying  it  securely  to 
the  string  at  back. 

Cut  a  cardboard  stand,  and  cover  in  leather  paper. 
Make  a  hinge  of  leather  or  material,  and  fasten  to  cardboard 
stand,  and  to  the  top  of  star  at  the  back.  The  frame  is 
suitable  then  for  standing  on  a  table,  or  if  desired,  can  be 


90  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

suspended  by  cord  or  ribbon.  The  pattern  described  gives 
a  raised  centre,  graduating  lower  towards  the  points,  but 
the  reverse  effect  is  obtained  by  starting  at  the  corners;  and 
winding  outwards  to  the  points. 

Although  the  winding  is  similar  and  easy  for  the  children, 
two  different  colours  will  give  quite  a  changed  appearance 
to  the  pattern. 

No.  III. 

Materials  required.— 1.  Star  shape  ;  No.  3,  in  pliable 
cardboard. 

2.  Strutt's  crochet  cotton. 

3.  Bead-headed  pins  (crystal). 

4.  Picture  for  centre. 

Method. — The  patterns  taught  in  this  article  are  the 
exact  reverse  of  the  preceding  one.  The  children  should 
first  wind  flat  cards  in  the  pattern  before  they  attempt  to 
pull  up  the  points  to  form  a  basket. 

Pattern  1. — Star  of  eight  equal  points.  Begin  in  the 
angle  or  corner,  and  wind  six  threads  outwards  towards 
the  points  in  one  colour,  turn  and  repeat  on  all  seven  sides. 
A  second  colour  may  be  used  or  not  in  the  succeeding 
rounds.  Fig.  84,  A  to  B,  shows  where  to  begin,  and  the 
section  taken  in  winding  each  time,  2 — 2,  3 — 3,  and  so  on. 

Pattern  2. — Begin  at  angles  and  wind  towards  points, 
using  six  threads  and  alternate  colours  each  round.. 

Pattern  3. — Begin  at  corners  and  wind  towards  the 
points,  and  use  a  different  colour  for  the  second  section  or 
side.  Alternate  the  two  colours  each  time  the  card  is 
turned,  thus  producing  four  sides  and  four  corners  of 
one  colour  and  four  sides  and  four  corners  of  another. 

Pattern  4. — Begin  at  corners,  wind  towards  the  points, 


FRAME   WEAVING 


and  use  eight  different  colours,  one  for  each  side,  keeping 
one  colour  to  the  same  side  throughout. 


FIG.  84. 


CARD  BASKET 

Materials  required.— l.  Large  star,  cut  in  pliable 
cardboard,  measuring  10  inches  from  point  to  point. 

2.  Blue  balls  of  crochet  cotton. 

3.  Yellow-tinted  picture. 

4.  Crystal-headed  pins. 

5.  Ball  of  silver  tinsel. 

The  foundation  must  be  cut  in  pliable  cardboard,  so  that 


92 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


the   points  may  be  gradually  pulled  up,  as  the  weaving 
nears  the  points. 

This  pretty  basket  is  wound  in  pale  blue  crochet  cotton, 
according  to  pattern  No.  1.  Fix  a  Christmas  card  in  the 
centre  with  gum,  and  then  tie  the  cotton  round  the  section, 
with  knot  at  back,  and  let  the  first  thread  lie  exactly  in 
the  corner.  Weave  six  threads  each  time,  and  continue 
winding  the  whole  star  in  the  one  colour.  As  the  weaving 


FIG.  85.— Card  Basket. 

proceeds  the  points  must  be  pulled  upwards,  and  a  crystal- 
headed  pin  stuck  in  each  point  to  keep  the  winding 
intact.  The  last  row  of  winding  is  of  silver  tinsel,  and  this 
is  twisted  round  the  pin  each  time  and  carried  twice  round 
from  point  to  point  to  form  a  loop  edge. 

Any  of  the  reverse  patterns  1,  2,  3,  4,  are  suitable  for 
this  basket,  but  are  not  so  pretty  if  wound  in  more  than 
one  or  two  colours.  The  basket  is  suitable  to  stand  on  a 
dressing-table,  or  it  could  be  hung  up  as  a  novel  picture 
frame. 

A  fancy  handle  of  cardboard  wound  in  cotton  and  tinsel 
can  be  added  if  desired. 


FRAME   WEAVING 


93 


NO.    IIlA. 

Materials  required— 1.  Strutt's  frame,  star  No.  2  or  3. 
2.  Strutt's  Macrame  twine,  No.  10. 


FIG.  86.— Key  Rack. 

3.  Small  square  of  plush  and  four  hooks  for  the  centre. 

4.  Brass-headed  nails. 


94 


VARIED  OCCUPA  TIONS  IN  IVEA  VING 


Method. — Examination  of  star,  and  use  to  which  it  is 
to  be  put.  Paste  velveteen  or  plush  exactly  in  the  centre  of 
frame,  and  let  it  tone  in  colour  with  the  string  to  be  used. 

The  same  section  of  frame  is  wound  as  in  previous 
articles  on  photo  frame  and  basket.  Two  colours  are  used, 


FIQ.  87. 

cream  and  brown,  and  an  entire  winding  is  done  in  each 
colour. 

1.  Take  the  brown  string  and  begin  to  wind  in  the 
middle  of  the  side,  equidistant  from  the  point  and  the 
corner,  wmdfour  threads,  turn  star,  and  repeat  winding  four 
brown  threads  exactly  in  the  centre  of  each  successive 
section  round  the  card. 


FRAME   WEAVING  95 

2.  A  complete  round  of  brown  is  now  succeeded  by  the 
cream  string.     Knot  the  new  colour  on  at  the  back,  and 
wind  in  same  manner  four  threads  of  cream  all  round  on 
the  right-h&nd  side  of  brown. 

3.  Two  rounds,  one  brown  and  one  cream,  are  now  on 
the  star.     Continue  with  the  cream  string  and  wind  four 
threads  all  round  on  the  left  side  of  the  brown. 

4.  The  star  is  completed  by  winding  brown  again  right 
and  left  of  the  cream,  and 

5.  Again  by  winding  cream  right  and  left  of  the  brown. 

6.  Continue   with   similar    bands   until    the    frame    is 
complete. 

The  pattern  is  very  effective,  and  is  low  in  the  centre  of 
each  side,  and  rises  towards  the  corners  and  points.  If 
worked  in  two  coloured  browns,  or  cream  and  brown,  it 
has  much  the  appearance  of  carved  wood.  Screw  in  four 
hooks  for  keys,  and  attach  plaited  cord  of  same  coloured 
strings  to  back  to  suspend  the  frame. 

A  variety  of  effects  in  this  pattern  may  be  obtained  by 
usincr  different  colours. 


No.  IV. — PICTURE  FRAME 

Materials  required. — 1.  Belper  frame  No.  10,  or  star 
frame  No.  3. 

2.  Strutt's  Macrame  twine,  No.  10. 

3.  Brass-headed  nails. 

This  is  a  very  effective  pattern,  and  looks  well  in  shaded 
strings,  beginning  with  the  dark  and  graduating  to  the 
light.  Or  if  the  worker  will  remember  that  the  pattern  is 
a  series  of  diamonds,  and  that  the  first  three  windings  form 
the  centre  spot  of  each  diamond,  it  will  then  be  easy  to 
determine  upon  the  colours.  The  diamonds  are  depressed 


96 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


in  the  centre,  and  each  successive  winding  of  string  forms 
a  frame  round  the  centre  spot. 

Centre. — The  landscape  and  the  glass  to  cover  the  centre 
must  first  be  secured  to  the  frame. 

1.  Wind  the  twine  three  times  round  the  frame,  com- 
mencing close  to  the  corner,  at  1.  Complete  the  other 
seven  sides. 


FIG.  88. 

2.  Wind  round  again  at  2  in  the  same  way,  and  with 
the  same  colour,  arid  complete  the  other  seven  sides. 

3.  Wind  round  again  at  3  in  the  same  way,  and  with 
the  same  colour,  and  complete  the  other  seven  sides.     These 
three  windings  will   form  the   depressed   centres   of   the 
diamonds. 

The  twine  may  now  be  cut  off  and  another  colour  joined 
on,  and  proceed  to  wind  three  threads  again  at  1,  and  three 
threads  at  3,  as  before.  Follow  this  by  winding  three 
rounds  on  each  side  of  the  middle  set,  2.  Repeat  on  the 
other  seven  sides  of  frame,  and  continue  same  process  of 


FRAME   WEAVING  97 

winding  at  1  and  3,  and  either  side  of  2  until  the  frame  is 
complete. 


FIG.  89.— Picture  Frame. 

The  last  windings  form  a  raised  pattern,  and  make  a 
very  pretty  frame. 

A  fresh  shade  of  twine  may  be  used  for  each  round  of 
the  frame  if  desired. 


98 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


Any  of  the  patterns  described  for  stars  1,  2,  and  3  are 
also  suitable  for  the  Belper  frame. 

The  Belper  frame  is  a  square  combined  with  a  rhomboid, 
and  oblong  in  shape,  and  suitable  for  photographs  and 
oblong  pictures. 

Patterns  for  stars  and  Belper  frames  may  be  summarised 
briefly  thus — 

1.  Begin  at  corners  and  wind  towards  points. 

2.  Begin  at  points  and  wind  towards  corners. 

3.  Begin  at  centre  and  wind  right  and  left  of  centre  to 
corners  and  points. 

4.  Begin  at  corners,  centre  and  points,  and  wind  right 
and  left  till  complete. 

The  same  section  of  three  points  is  used  throughout  for 
both  frames. 

The  Sun  Frame. — This  frame  has  sixteen  points,  eight 

small  and  eight  large. 

First  attach  the  picture 
or  photo  for  the  centre,  and 
wind  six  times  round  the 
small  points  from  A  to  B. 
The  first  thread  must  lie 
close  to  the  outside  of  the 
points,  and  gradually  fill 
inwards.  Kepeat  this  wind- 
ing of  six  threads  on  each 
of  the  other  small  points. 
Having  done  this,  cut  the 
twine  and  tie  another  colour  to  it  and  proceed  to  wind 
another  six  threads  from  A  to  B,  and  on  each  of  the  other 
seven  small  points  as  before.  Continue  in  the  same  way 
till  the  small  points  are  full. 

To  wind  the  large  points  any  of  the  patterns  described 


2) 


FIG.  90. 


FRAME  WEAVING  99 

for  the  star  and  Belper  frames  are  suitable.  A  good 
pattern  for  this  part  is  the  following : — 

Wind  three  times  round  the  section  C — D,  commencing 
close  to  the  corner  where  marked  1 — 2 ;  then  take  the  thread 
to  the  outer  edge  of  points  and  wind  three  times  where 
marked  3 — 4.  This  should  be  repeated  on  the  other  seven 
sides.  Now  cut  off  the  twine  and  tie  another  colour  to  it, 
and  proceed  to  wind  three  times  again  from  1 — 2  and  again 
from  3 — 4,  and  wind  on  the  remaining  seven  points  in  the 
same  way.  Complete  the  frame  by  repeating  the  process 
till  sides  are  full. 

Second  Pattern. — Another  way  of  winding  this  frame  is 
by  beginning  in  the  corner  of  the  small  angles  and  winding 
three  threads,  then  in  the  corner  of  the  adjoining  large 
angles,  then  the  small,  and  so  winding  round  the  star  till 
the  small  angles  are  covered  and  the  large  half-full.  Finish 
by  winding  the  large  angles  only,  as  in  preceding  pattern. 
Immediately  the  small  points  are  full  add  a  brass-headed 
nail  to  keep  string  in  position. 


A  PLAQUE 

Materials  required.— 1.  Strutt's  circular  cardboard 
frames. 

2.  Strutt's  fine  twine,  No.  10. 

3.  Brass-headed  nails. 

4.  A  centre  spray  of  flowers  and  glass. 

Fig.  91  represents  the  largest  circular  star  of  thirty- 
two  points.  The  centre  consists  of  a  tawny  yellow  card, 
upon  which  is  laid  a  spray  of  yellow  and  white  Marguerites 
and  leaves,  which  was  cut  from  one  of  the  penny  coloured 
text-cards  by  a  child  of  six  years  in  the  paper-cutting  class. 
A  12-inch  square  of  glass  is  placed  over  the  spray  and 


100 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


secured  with  string  to  the  cardboard  frame.  The  promi- 
nent tints  of  the  picture  are  tawny  yellow  and  green  ;  these 
two  colours  are  chosen  for  the  winding,  and  are  used 


FIG.  91.— A  Plaque.     Finished  Sketch. 

alternately.  The  rule  of  dividing  the  points  by  four  acts 
perfectly  in  this  case — 3T2  =8  +  1=9. 

Take  nine  points  in  every  wind,  step-wise  round  the  star. 

Begin  in  the  angle,  wind  three  threads  round  No.  1  and 
No.  9  angles,  turn  star,  move  down  one  point,  and  wind 
three  threads  round  No.  2  and  No.  10  angles,  and  so  on  all 


FRAME  WEAVING    ' 

round  till  one  band  is  complete.  Cut  off  and  join  on 
second  colour,  and  wind  round  in  same  manner  close  to  the 
last  weaving.  Continue  to  use  the  alternate  colours  until 
the  extreme  points  are  reached.  Secure  the  string  with 
brass-headed  nails,  and  finish  off  at  back. 

The  pattern  is  started  from  the  angle  and  worked  out- 
wards ;  it  therefore  has  a  low  centre  and  raised  frame.  The 
successive  winds  form  a  very  pretty  round  centre. 


FIG.  92. 

The  opposite  effect  would  be  produced  by  starting  at  the 
points,  but  not  with  so  good  results. 

These  frames  are  useful  for  mounting  any  good  hand- 
work. 

Great  care  needs  to  be  taken  in  the  choice  of  colours. 
A  wise  rule  is  to  wind  with  strings  in  harmony  with  centre. 

The  plaque  is  improved  and  shown  to  advantage  if 
mounted  on  a  larger  circle  of  cardboard,  covered  with 
velveteen  or  plush. 


OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

When  finished  it  is  quite  a  work  of  art,  and  fit  for  any 
sitting-room,  and  yet  can  be  entirely  managed  by  an  average 
child  of  six  or  seven  years. 

The  border  is  narrowed  or  widened  according  to  the 
number  of  points  taken  in  winding.  If  a  less  number  than 
nine  points  be  taken  the  border  will  be  narrow  and  the 
centre  larger,  and  if  more  than  nine  points  be  taken  the 
border  will  be  wider  and  the  centre  smaller.  A  teacher 
must  judge  how  many  points  to  enclose  to  suit  the  size  of 
the  centre  chosen.  Small  circular  cards  for  practice  might 
be  cut  in  thin  cardboard  and  wound  in  cotton. 


STRING  WEAVING  ON  CANE 
Materials  required. — 1.  Split  cane,  No.  1. 

2.  Macrame  string. 

Occupation. — This  occupation  is  a  very  good  exercise 
to  precede  the  ordinary  cane  weaving,  now  so  common  in 
our  schools.  The  children  master  the  new  difficulty  of 
weaving  a  round  object  by  not  having  unmanageable  cane 
to  encounter  at  the  time.  The  centre  foundation  represents 
the  Kindergarden  tight  mat,  and  the  continuous  weaving 
thread  represents  the  loose  strips.  The  pliability  of  the 
string  renders  the  weaving  much  easier  for  the  children  to 
manage  than  starting  with  cane  from  the  first. 

Method  of  Teaching". — To  Make  a  Small  Round  Mat.— 
Supply  each  child  with  eight  strands  of  cane  about  eight 
inches  long,  and  a  small  ball  of  string  two  or  three  yards  in 
length. 

1.  Lay  four  strands  transversely  upon  the  other  four  to 
form  a  cross,  A,  B,  C,  D. 


STRING   WEAVING  ON  CANE 


103 


2.  Hold  the  centre  firmly  between  the  thumb  and  finger 
of  left  hand. 

3.  With  a  strand  of  fine  cane  in  right  hand,  leave  an  end 
E,  and  hold  under  left  thumb. 

4.  (a)  Cross  diagonally  the  centre ;  (b)  back  under  set  of 
A  strands ;  (c)  cross  centre  diagonally ;  (d)  pass  under  set 
of  B  strands. 

This  crossing  will  secure  the  strands,  and  the  cane  must 
be  pulled  quite  tight  to  form  a  compact  centre.     Consider 


FIG.  93. 

the  single  end  as  a  set  of  four,  and  weave  over  and  under 
for  about  three  rounds.  It  is  necessary  to  have  an  uneven 
number  of  strands  for  circular  weaving,  to  make  the  weav- 
ing alternate  properly. 

It  is  best  for  a  teacher  to  get  her  centres  ready  made  for 
the  first  few  lessons,  after  which  each  child  might  attempt 
to  begin  for  himself. 

The  sets  of  strands  A,  B,  C,  D,  are  next  to  be  divided, 
and  the  single  end  E  still  treated  as  a  set,  this  time  as  two. 
Begin  on  with  the  end  of  string,  and  weave  two  over  and 


IO4 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


two  under  for  about  six  rounds,  keeping  the  string  tight  and 
the  rounds  close  together. 

This  done,  divide  the  "twos"  into  "ones,"  and  weave 


FIG.  94.— Border. 

another  six  or  more  rows  until  the  mat  is  about  three  inches 
in  diameter. 

Border. — 1.  Cut  all  the  strands  of  equal  length. 

2.  Take  any  one  strand,  pass  it  behind  the  next,  and 
down  by  the  side  of  the  second. 


FIG.  95.— Table. 


By  first  inserting  a  knitting  needle  no  difficulty  will  be 
found  in  threading  down  the  ends  into  the  weaving. 

Table. — Weave  a  mat  of  4  inches  diameter,  according  to 


STRING  WEAVING  ON  CANE  105 

preceding  directions,  with  strands  of  cane  12  inches  long 
for  the  top. 

Pedestal. — Push  the  ends  of  strands  of  border  into 
weaving  as  far  as  the  cane  centre,  drawing  them  down  on 
the  under  side  to  form  the  pedestal  of  table.  Take  all  the 
strands  and  bind  together,  winding  them  with  string  to 
within  an  inch  of  the  bottom. 


Claw. — Divide  the  strands  equally  into  three  sets,  and 
wind  each  set  with  string  to  form  the  three  claws  of 
pedestal. 

Chair. — This  is  made  very  similarly  to  the  table.  Weave 
a  small  mat,  and  bring  the  ends  of  strands  out  under- 
neath, a  few  rows  from  the  border.  Divide  these  into 
four  sets,  and  wind  each  set  with  string  to  form  the  four 
legs. 


106  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Round  Bach — Weave  a  similar  circle  for  the  back,  and 
leave  three  or  four  adjoining  strands  unfinished  in  the 
border.  These  must  be  interwoven  into  the  under  side  of 
seat,  to  join  the  seat  and  back  together.  The  circle  must 
be  bent  upright  to  form  the  back. 

Straight  Back. — The  straight  back,  as  shown  in  Fig.  96, 
is  made  by  inserting  four  or  more  consecutive  upright 
strands  into  the  seat,  and  weaving  backwards  and  forwards. 
The  ends  are  pinched  and  pushed  down  to  the  bottom  of 
the  back  to  give  firmness  and  strength  to  the  weaving. 

The  lesson  should  be  made  interesting  by  talking  of 
the  colour  of  string — of  what  made,  and  how  made — the 
cane,  how  obtained,  etc.  The  articles  to  be  made  should 
also  form  an  object  lesson  upon  "tables  and  chairs,"  etc. 

Baskets,  partly  made  of  cane  and  string,  are  very  pretty, 
and  can  easily  be  made  from  the  same  instructions  given  in 
cane  weaving. 


WEAVING  WITH  MACRAME  TWINE 

Small  articles  look  better  and  more  artistic  when  woven 
with  the  fine  Macrame  twine. 

The  colours  are  very  beautiful,  of  forty  different  shades, 
and  may  be  purchased  retail  in  J-lb.  balls,  or  wholesale  in 
3-lb.  packets. 

The  weaving  is  very  fine,  and  therefore  the  number  of 
strands  required  for  the  foundation  are  twice  as  many  as 
those  used  with  No.  4  string,  otherwise  the  plan  of  weaving 
the  mat  is  exactly  the  same. 

Materials  required.— 1.  Fine  split  cane,  No.  0  or  1. 

2.  Fine  Macrame  twine. 

Preparation   by  Teacher.— l.    Cut   the    cane   in 


WEAVING  WITH  MACRAME  TWINE 


107 


lengths   of    12  inches,   allowing  sixteen  lengths  for  each 
child. 

2.  Lay  eight  strands  horizontally,  and  the  other  eight 
transversely  to  form  a  four-armed  cross. 

3.  Hold  the  centre  firmly  between  left  thumb  and  finger, 


and  with  another  strand  14  inches  long  secure  the  centre 
thus — 

4.  Under  D  to  A.  Cross  over  from  A  to  B  diagonally. 
Under  top  set  to  C.  Cross  diagonally  C  to  D.  Twist  cane 
to  first  end,  and  treat  as  a  pair.  Wind  end  of  string,  or 
tie  to  this  pair,  and  begin  to  weave  at  once,  two  over  and 
two  under.  There  are  nine  pairs  including  the  binding 
strands,  and  this  will  allow  the  weaving  to  alternate 


108  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

correctly,  and  there  will  be  no  need  to  insert  odd  rays. 
As  children  find  the  foundations  rather  difficult  to  manage, 
it  is  far  better  for  a  teacher,  or  the  sharp  children,  to 
prepare  the  cane  centres  before  the  lesson,  so  that  all  the 
class  can  work  together  and  follow  the  directions  given  by 
the  teacher  from  time  to  time.  It  is  wonderful  what  can 
be  taught  well  if  a  little  preparation  is  made,  and  the  class 
kept  at  exactly  the  same  work. 

EOUND  MAT 

The  Object  to  be  Made. — A  round  flat  mat,  about  four  or 
five  inches  in  diameter. 

Supply  each  child  with  a  ready-made  centre  and  string 
attached.  Begin  by  weaving  two  over  and  two  under,  and 
continue  until  the  mat  is  3  inches  in  diameter.  See 
that  the  rays  are  spread  evenly,  and  make  a  good  shaped 
circle.  The  teacher  must,  from  time  to  time,  examine  the 
work,  and  pull  the  rays  in  place.  When  the  centre  is  3 
inches  across  cut  off  one  strand,  leaving  thirty-three  rays. 
Immediately  after  the  single  strand,  begin  to  separate  the 
pairs  into  "  ones  "  and  weave  about  half  an  inch  more  all 
round  in  this  way. 

Border. — Pass  the  end  of  twine  into  weaving  for  security, 
and  proceed  to  finish  the  ends  of  cane. 

Cut  all  the  spokes  equal  in  length.  Hold  the  mat 
vertically,  and  take  any  ray,  pass  it  behind  the  next,  and 
push  the  end  down  into  the  weaving,  close  by  the  side  of 
the  second  ray  from  it.  Continue  this  process  until  all  the 
rays  have  been  treated  in  the  same  manner. 

The  article,  finished,  should  present  a  very  delicate  and 
pretty  mat,  which  may  be  adapted  to  the  following 
uses : — 


WEAVING  WITH  MACK  A  ME  TWINE 


109 


1.  Pin-cushion. — Cut  a  round  of  cardboard,  about  two 
inches  in  diameter,  and  place  a  wedge  of  wool,  wadding,  or 
frayings,  on  the  top,  securing  it  to  cardboard  by  a  few 
stitches. 

Next  cut  a  circle  of  velvet  or  satin  about  four  inches  in 


FIG.  98.— Pin-cushion. 

diameter.  Gather  the  edge  rather  coarsely  with  thread, 
place  inside  the  wool  and  cardboard,  and  draw  up  tightly 
and  fasten  off.  Sew  the  cushion  exactly  in  the  centre  of 
mat. 

Fig.  98  represents  a  mat  woven  with  biscuit-colour 
string  and  a  crimson  plush  cushion.  The  border  of  mat  is 
interlaced  with  crimson  satin  ribbon  J  inch  wide.  The 


1 10  VARIED  OCCUPA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VING 

pin-cushion  may  be  suspended,  if  desired,  or  used  flat  on  the 

table. 

2.    Needle -book — Two   of    the   mats    may   be   used   as 

covers  for  a   needle-book.     They  need  no  lining,   as   the 

work,  if  nicely  done,  will 
look  well  either  side. 
Cut  three  or  four  circles 
of  coloured  flannel  the 
size  of  centre  of  mat,  pink, 
red,  white,  or  blue,  which- 
ever harmonises  best  with 
the  colour  of  the  twine. 
Snip  the  edges  all  round, 
and  insert  them  between 
the  two  mats.  Sew  the 
backs  together,  and  or- 
nament with  bows  of 
ribbon. 

3.  Letter  Hack. — Four 
or  more  mats  may  be  used 
for  this  article. 

Fig.  99  represents 
a  cardboard  foundation 
covered  with  peacock  blue 
velveteen,  and  four  mats 
woven  in  old  gold 
Macrame  twine. 

Cut  the  foundation  in 
stout    cardboard,     about 
sixteen  inches  long  and 
FIG.  99.— Letter  Rack.  six  inches  wide.     Shape 

the  top  as  in  Fig.  99,  and  cover  in  velveteen  by  pasting  the 

edges  well  over  on  the  wrong  side. 


SINGLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING  in 

Next  sew  on  the  mats,  securing  them  only  at  the  bottom. 
Allow  the  next  mat  to  overlap,  to  hide  the  stitches,  or  add 
a  bow  of  ribbon  at  the  bottom  of  each  mat  instead.  Cover 
the  back  with  sateen,  and  slip-stitch  to  the  edge  of  velveteen, 
or  paste  on  a  leather-paper  back  for  neatness.  Finish  the 
top  with  bow  and  ends  of  ribbon. 

4.  Candle  Shade. — Fasten  a  brass  candle-clip  to  a  mat  in 
the  following  way : — Insert  the  hook  of  the  clip  into  the 
weaving  at  the  border — not  the  centre — and  fasten  with  a  few 
stitches.     A  pair  of  these  candle  shades  will  be  found  use- 
ful and  artistic  for  piano  candles. 

Of  course,  the  colours  should  be  carefully  chosen. . 

Note. — The  directions  here  given  for  making  mat  are  suitable 
for  other  materials,  such  as  wool,  ribbon,  cane,  etc. 

5.  Card  Basket. — Tie  six  mats  together  with  bows   of 
ribbon  and  take  one  a    little  larger   and   tie   in  for  the 
bottom  and  to  the  borders  of  the  six  small  ones. 


SINGLE  STEAND  CHAIR-CANING 

Introduction. — For  this  opcupation  the  slates  which 
are  condemned  as  useless  are  broken  up,  and  the  frames 
utilised  in  the  following  way  : — 

They  are  first  cleaned  by  the  boys  with  a  piece  of 
sand -paper.  This  little  performance  forms  a  pleasant 
pastime  for  one  afternoon,  when  each  boy  will  vie  with 
his  neighbour  to  get  the  greatest  smoothness  and  best 
gloss  and  colour. 


H2  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

The  next  step  is  to  drill  holes.  These  must  be  about  a 
quarter  of  an  inch  in  diameter  and  placed  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  apart. 

The  little  boys  were  given  a  trial  to  do  this  part  of  the 
work  with  small  gimlets,  but  the  result  was  not  satisfactory, 
for  the  following  reasons  : — The  wood  was  hard  and  cross- 
grained,  and  split  if  not  judiciously  managed,  and  many  of 
the  boys  were  too  weak  in  the  wrist  to  make  much  progress. 
The  best  plan  is  to  have  all  the  slates  uniformly  drilled  by 
a  carpenter  with  a  J-inch  stock  and  bit. 

The  holes  must  be  drilled  to  correspond  exactly  on 
opposite  sides,  and  one  hole  must  be  made  in  each  corner 
for  the  diagonal  weaving. 

Each  boy  must  have  his  own  "pegger."  This  is  a  little 
peg  to  wedge  into  the  holes  and  keep  the  cane  from  slipping 
after  it  has  been  tightly  strained  into  position.  Each  boy 
will  readily  bring  his  own,  made  from  a  piece  of  firewood ; 
or,  if  the  small  signal  pointers  used  for  reading  be  in  use 
in  the  school,  they  answer  admirably  and  look  much  nicer 
for  class  use  than  the  rough  pegs. 

The  cane  used  is  bought  in  pound  bundles,  and  one 
bundle  will  last  a  long  time.  It  varies  in  price  according 
to  size,  from  Is.  to  Is.  4d.  per  pound.  The  sizes  1,  2,  and 
3  are  most  useful,  and  Nos.  4  and  5,  being  wider,  are  best 
for  headings. 

Preparation. — Soak  the  cane  for  one  or  two  hours 
before  using,  it  will  then  be  found  soft  and  pliable,  and 
each  length  of  cane  must  be  drawn  sharply  across  the 
blade  of  a  knife,  to  get  rid  of  all  superfluous,  pithy 
matter,  and  leave  the  cane  thin,  pliable,  and  soft.  To  do 
this  quickly,  place  a  piece  of  felt  or  leather  or  carpet  across 
your  knee,  and,  holding  the  knife  firmly  upon  the  pithy 
side  of  the  cane,  draw  the  cane  sharply  under  it  with  the 


SINGLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING  113 

left  hand,  when  all  uneven  pieces  will  be  scraped  off  and 
the  cane  become  of  uniform  thickness.  This  little  hint  is 
the  great  secret  of  obtaining  good  chair-caning. 

There  are  several  difficulties  to  encounter,  and  these 
should  not  be  presented  all  at  one  time,  therefore  the 
easy  method  of  single  strand  chair- caning,  the  one  in 
common  practice  with  ordinary  street  chair-caners,  is  first 
taken. 


/J 


0      <jj 

1 

1     < 

LJ 

j>     4 

—  \ 

0 

0 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

e 

0      « 

>     < 

»      « 

I 

1 

a 

FIG.  100. 

Method. — Give  each  boy  a  drilled  slate,  pegger,  and  a 
length  of  cane  (scraped  and  wet). 

To  begin,  pass  the  end  (glazed  side  uppermost)  down 
top  corner  hole  No.  1,  and  pull  the  end  forward  under- 
neath, and  pass  down  through  the  hole  again.  Pull  tightly 
and  the  wet  cane  will  cling  to  the  frame  of  the  slate  and 
make  a  firm  beginning. 

The  cane  being  soft  and  pliable  will  cling  round  the 
frame ;  the  long  end  must  be  pulled  thoroughly  tight  and 
the  pegger  placed  in  the  hole ;  then  the  short  end  is  cut  oft' 


114  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

close  to  the  frame.     No  unsightly  knots  or  ends  should  be 
permitted  at  the  back  of  the  work. 

The  weaving  is  carried  on  on  one  side  of  the  slate  only, 
the  glazed  side  of  the  cane  must  always  be  uppermost, 
and  to  secure  this  uniformity  the  twist  of  the  cane  is 
managed  when  passing  from  hole  to  hole. 

Weaving. — Pass  cane  across  to  opposite  side  of  slate 
and  thread  down  No.  2  and  up  through  No.  4  on  the  same 
side ;  pull  tightly  and  peg.  Now  cross  over  and  pass  down 
No.  3  hole  and  up  through  No.  5  hole ;  pull  tightly  and  • 
peg.  Cross  back  again,  and  continue  working  two  holes 
each  side  in  this  manner  till  all  are  done. 
^  When  a  new  strand  of  cane  needs  beginning  on,  it  must 
be  done  in  the  following  neat  way  : — Thread  up  the  end  of 
last  strand  through  the  next  holej  as  usual,  and  also  thread 
up  through  the  -same  hole  the  new  strand,  which  must  have 
the  end  turned  with  one  single  knot.  Pull  the  new  and 
old  strands  tightly  up  through  the  hole,  and  let  the  former 
lie  upon  the  latter ;  place  the  pegger  in  the  hole  and  cut 
off  the  old  strand  close  to  the  frame.  The  end  will  never 
come  out,  and  the  back  of  the  work  is  neat  and  free  from 
unsightly  twists  and  ends. 

Crossing. — The  sides  of  the  slate  are  next  to  be  treated 
in  the  same  manner,  and  at  this  stage  they  are  not  to  be 
woven  but  crossed  from  side  to  side  upon  the  top  of  the 
first  set  of  strands  and  pulled  tight' and  pegged  as  before 
described. 

If  the  strand  of  cane  be  long  enough  to  continue  on  to 
the  sides,  thread  the  end  across  to  first  hole  and  proceed 
as  before.  Remember  to  avoid  the  corner  holes  ;  they  are 
only  used  for  the  diagonal  weaving. 

Diagonal  leaving. — The  children  may  probably  have 
some  knowledge  of  this  kind  of  weaving  if  they  have  been 


SINGLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING 


taught  upon  paper  mats.     If  not,   it  is  very  simple  and 
easily  understood  by  the  children  if  explained  in  this  way. 
The  weaving  at  this  stage  consists  of  a  series  of  open 


FIG.  101. 


squares,  composed  of  horizontal  lines  at  top  and  vertical 
lines  underneath.     The  rule  of  all  weaving  is  to  reverse  the 


\ 


\ 


\ 


\ 


\ 


V 


\ 


\ 


\ 


FIG.  102. 


order  of  the  last  weaving,  and  the  children  will  readily  say 
that  the  upright  or  vertical  strands  must  be  lifted  up, 
and  the  horizontal  strands  passed  over  or  put  down.  See 
that  the  children  understand  the  meaning  of  the  word 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


"  diagonal,"  and  illustrate  what  is  meant  and  required  on 
the  blackboard. 

All  the  children  will  have  to  remember  is,  "  Lift  up  all 
the  standing  up  strands,"  threading  from  corner  to  corner. 
Begin  at  bottom  right-hand  corner  and  thread  from  corner 
to  opposite  corner.  The  strands  for  diagonals  are  cut  in 
lengths  and  the  ends  passed  down  into  the  holes,  where 
they  are  afterwards  secured  with  wooden  pegs. 

In  reversing,  the  diagonal  weaving  to  go  the  opposite 


FIG.  103. 

way,  turn  the  slate  round  till  the  next  empty  corner  is  on 
the  right  hand,  and  proceed  with  the  reverse  diagonal. 
This  will  be  just  the  opposite  to  the  last  process — all  the 
horizontal  lines  will  be  lifted  up  and  the  verticals  crossed 
over.  Lead  the  children  to  see  that  their  diagonals  should 
cross  each  other  on  all  the  sides  of  the  squares — one 
diagonal  must  be  on  top  and  the  other  cross  on  the  bottom  ; 
if  two  diagonals  touch  each  other  the  work  is  wrong,  and 
must  be  undone.  >  . 

Pegging. — If  the  holes  be  not  too  large,  the  ordinary 
bundles  of  Kindergarten  sticks  will  do  for  pegging  purposes, 


SINGLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING  117 

but  the  boys  arc  ever  ready  with  pocketsful  of  nicely  sharp- 
ened little  pegs  for  the  purpose.  In  fact,  they  are  so  zealous 
in  the  pegging  part  that  they  will  peg  more  than  one  would 
wish,  and  must  be  looked  after.  It  is  desirable  only  to 
let  pegging  be  done  to  really  satisfactory  work,  and  this 
rule  is  a  great  incentive  in  producing  carefulness.  The 
Kindergarten  sticks  can  be  wedged  and  pushed  in  by 
the  hand  and  cut  off,  but  pegs  for  chairs  must  be  cut  a 
little  larger  than  the  hole,  and  knocked  firmly  in  with  a 
hammer,  and  then  levelled  with  a  sharp  knife.  Knives  at 
4d.  each  are  supplied  to  the  boys,  and  no  accident  has  yet 
occurred  in  either  scraping  the  cane  or  pegging,  although 
the  work  has  been  in  practice  for  three  years. 

The  great  advantages  of  the  work  are  that  it  is  inex- 
pensive, useful, -easily  undone,  and  that  common  string  can 
be  used  for  teaching  purposes  until  the  whole  method  of 
weaving  and  pegging  is  thoroughly  understood.  The 
writer  has  used  string  for  teaching  purposes  with  great 
success. 

Double  strand  chair-caning  will  be  taught  in  next  article. 

Note. — As  the  slate  frames  are  not  perfectly  square  the 
diagonal  will  cross  to  the  top  hole  on  side  and  not  to  the  corner 
hole,  which  would  be  the  case  if  the  slates  were  square  and  the 
holes  equal.  By  turning  slate  with  the  long  sides  vertical,  the 
second  diagonal  may  be  woven  exactly  according  to  the  rules  for 
the  first,  viz.  "Lift  up  the  'standing  up'  strands."  If  this 
method  be  adopted,  it  will  be  found  simpler  and  easier  for  the 
children. 


u8  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


DOUBLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING 

Materials  required.—  1.  Split  cane,  No.  3,  for  the 
transverse  crossings,  and  No.  2,  for  the  diagonal  weaving. 

2.  A  wooden  pegger. 

3.  Sharp  knife. 

4.  Firewood  pegs. 

5.  Drilled  slate  frame. 

Method. —  The  cane  used  for  double  strand  chair- 
caning  must  be  of  finer  quality  than  that  used  for  single 
strand,  or  the  work  will  be  clumsy.  The  cane  used  for  the 
diagonal  weaving  should  always  be  a  grade  finer  than  that 
used  for  the  first  two  crossings.  The  diagonal  weaving  is 
the  most  difficult  to  manage,  and  to  do  it  successfully  the 
cane  should  be  thoroughly  soaked  and  scraped  loth  sides ; 
this  will  remove  all  stiffness  and  render  it  so  pliable  that 
it  can  easily  be  pulled  along  into  place  as  the  weaving 
proceeds.  The  strands  for  diagonals  should  be  measured 
and  cut  a  little  longer  than  required,  so  that  the  ends  may 
be  inserted  in  the  holes  of  the  frame,  where  they  will  be 
secured  by  wooden  pegs.  Always  work  the  way  of  the 
grain  of  the  cane  and  avoid  faulty  pieces,  otherwise  when 
straining  the  cane  the  weak  place  will  give  way,  and  much 
of  the  work  may  have  to  be  done  again  in  consequence. 

Soak  the  cane  for  quite  two  hours  before  using,  and 
scrape  the  rough  side  to  remove  all  uneven  pith. 

Beginning. — Place  slates  length  way  on  desk,  and  begin 
in  top  left-hand  hole  (No.  1,  not  the  corner  hole).  Pass 
the  end  down  through  the  hole  and  pull  it  forward  inside 
frame,  and  thread  down  into  the  same  hole,  pull  the  long 
end  tightly  and  cross  over  down  into  opposite  hole  (No.  2), 


DOUBLE  STRAND  CHAIR-CANING 


119 


and  up  through  the  next  on  same  side  (No.  3).     Cross  back 
and  down  through  No.  4  and  up  through  No.  5,  and  so  on. 

The  children  will  soon  learn  that  the  method  employed 
is  "  down  and  up  "  on  one  side,  "  cross  over,"  and  "  down 
and  up "  on  the  opposite  side.  The  glazed  side  of  cane 
must  be  kept  uppermost,  and  the  cane  must  lie  flat  when 
coming  from  the  holes. 

After  the  slate  has  been  crossed  once,  the  same  process 
must  be  repeated  again,  threading  the  cane  into  the  same 
holes.  The  best  method  is  to  complete  the  first  crossing 
and  pass  the  end  up  through  an  adjoining  hole  on  the  sides, 
and  then  begin  again,  either  with  a  single  tie-knot,  or,  as 
in  first  beginning,  in  the  last  hole  threaded.  The  second 
weaving  strand  will  be  passed  into  the  same  holes  as  the 
first,  and  come  out  on  opposite  side  of  slate. 

Crossing. — The  slate  when  threaded  double  one  way  has 
now  to  be  crossed.  This  crossing  is  woven,  and  must  be 
worked  with  two  strands,  one  coming  from  either  side. 

Thread  a  length  of  cane  in  the  top  hole  on  each  side 
(not  the  corner  hole),  and  with  the  right  strand  weave 
across,  one  over  and  one  1458 

under,  to  the  opposite  side, 
and  pass  the  strand  down 
through  the  same  hole  that 
the  other  length  proceeds 
from.  Now  take  the  left- 
hand  length  and  weave 
across,  reversing  the  weaving 
of  the  preceding  row,  and 
thread  the  end  down  through 
the  hole  of  the  first  strand. 

Pull   each  tightly  across  and  pe 


7. 


3.      6. 

FIG.  104. 

Keep  the  weaving 
close  together  to  form  little  woven  squares,  as  in  Fig.  104. 


120 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


FIG.  105. 


Pass  both  strands  on  the  under  side  of  slate  to  the  next 

holes   on  both   sides  and  repeat  the  weaving  as  before. 

Continue  till  the  crossing  is 
complete. 

Diagonal  weaving  with 
finer  cane  must  now  be 
woven  across.  The  strands 
are  cut  in  lengths,  and  any 
small  pieces  left  from  the 
previous  weaving  can  be 
used  up  for  the  short 
diagonals. 

The  same  method  taught 
in  single  strand  is  used  here. 
The  double  transverse 

strands  are  not  separated,  but  treated  as  one  strand,  and 

the  horizontal  strands  are  "lifted  up"  when  weaving  from 

right  to  left  hand  corner,  and  the  reverse — i.e.  "lifting  up" 

the   vertical   strands   when    the 

second     diagonal    begins     from 

"left  to  right." 

This   completes  the  weaving. 

The    ends    are    threaded    down 

into  their  respective  holes    and 

secured    in    place    by   a    round 

piece  of  wood  called  a  peg. 

The    pegs    are    easily    made 

of      firewood     by     the     boys. 

They   should  be   a  little  larger  FIG.  106. 

than  the  holes,  and  hammered  tightly  in.     All  ends  should 

be  cut  off  underneath  for  the  work  to  present  a  tidy  and 

neat  appearance. 

See  that  the   diagonals   cross    each    other,    one    under 


CHA  IK-  CA  NING  1 2 1 

and   one  over,   upon   the  double  horizontal    and    vertical 
strands. 

How  to  cane  an  ordinary  chair  will  be  taught  in  next 
article. 


CHAIR-CANING 
How  TO  CANE  A  CHAIR 

Preparation. — 1.  Soak  cane  thoroughly. 

2.  Scrape  off  pith  on  wrong  side. 

3.  Have  finer  cane  for  the  diagonal  weaving. 

4.  Cut  away  the  old  canework  from  chair  and  clear  each 
hole  with  hammer  and  chair-caner's  punch. 

Materials  required.— 1.  For  single  strand  caning  use 
No.  4  cane,  and  cross  diagonally  with  No.  3. 

2.  For  double  strand  chair-caning,  seat  with  No.  3,  and 
cross  with  No.  2. 

3.  Chair-caner's  punch  and  hammer. 

4.  Firewood  for  pegs. 

5.  Wooden  pegger. 

Method  Of  Teaching1.— When  the  children  understand 
the  method  of  chair-caning  as  taught  upon  the  slate  frames 
in  preceding  articles,  it  is  a  great  encouragement  to  them, 
and  a  pleasure  to  their  parents,  if  they  be  allowed  to  bring 
a  chair  from  home  on  which  to  show  their  skill. 

Single  strand  chair-cariing  is  the  one  suitable  for  infants, 
and  double  strand  should  riot  be  attempted  except  on  the 
slate  frame. 

The  chair  having  been  freed  in  all  the  holes  from  cane  and 
dirt  is  now  ready  for  caning.  First  count  the  holes  between 
the  corner  holes  back  and  front.  In  an  ordinary  chair  there 
are  generally  seventeen  holes  at  the  back  and  twenty-three 


122  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

holes  in  front.  The  difference  between  seventeen  and 
twenty-three  is  six ;  therefore  six  side  strands  will  have  to 
be  threaded  three  on  each  side,  and  seventeen  strands  from, 
back  to  front.  The  side  strands  are  called  "scallunis." 
To  ascertain  how  many  scallums  will  be  required  in  a  chair 
seat,  always  count  the  holes  (between  the  corner  holes) 
back  and  front,  and  the  difference  divided  will  be  the 
number  of  scallums  for  each  side. 

Beginning. — If  the  number  of  holes  back  and  front  be 
the  same,  then  begin  with  a  loop  on  the  front  of  chair ;  but 
if  the  number  of  holes  be  greater  in  the  front  than  at  the 
back  (as  in  Fig.  107),  then  begin  at  the  side,  and  work  from 
front  to  back  of  the  chair.  The  grain  of  the  cane  must  run 
in  this  direction. 

Begin,  according  to  directions  given  in  first  lesson,  at  the 
seventh  hole  (side),  counting  from  the  lower  corner ;  cross 
over  to  front  and  pass  down  into  the  first  front  hole — the 
next  after  corner  hole — making  a  short  scallum.  Thread  the 
cane  up  through  second  hole  on  front  and  cross  into  the 
tenth  hole  on  the  side,  or  the  third  hole  above  the  last 
scallum.  This  gives  the  second  side  scallum.  Pass  cane 
underneath  to  the  fourteenth  hole  on  the  same  side,  and 
bring  it  across  to  the  third  front  hole.  This  completes  the 
third  scallum.  The  threading  is  now  straightforward  from 
back  to  front  for  seventeen  rows,  when  the  three  scallums 
on  the  opposite  side  must  be  threaded  to  correspond  with 
the  first.  The  worker  must  judge  her  distances  apart  for 
the  scallums  on  the  side  of  the  chair. 

The  great  point  to  be  remembered  is,  that  they  thread 
consecutively  into  the  first  three  and  last  three  of  the  front 
row  of  holes,  and  must  run  in  parallel  lines  to  the  holes  on 
side  of  chair.  The  numbers  given  in  the  above  directions 
will  slightly  differ  in  chairs  of  different  shapes.  The  back 


CHA IR-  CANING 


123 


corner  holes  must  be  kept  free   for  the  diagonal  strands 
(Fig.  107). 

Crossing. — If  single  strand  caning  is  to  be  taught,  then 
the  transverse  crossing  will  be  commenced  from  the  first 
hole  after  the  corner  on  each  side.  The  front  of  the  chair 
being  slightly  curved,  two  or  three  horizontal  scallums  will 
be  needed  across  the  front.  They  are  threaded  across  the 


Fia.  107. 

front  from  hole  to  hole,  as  in  Fig.  108.  This  crossing  is 
not  to  be  woven,  but  simply  laid  across  the  top  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  vertical  strands  (Fig.  107). 

These  two  crossings  being  complete,  the  diagonal  strands 
have  now  to  be  inserted.  Measure  these,  and  cut  in  lengths 
and  scrape  both  sides  to  give  pliability.  The  back  corner 
holes  must  not  be  used  in  either  the  vertical  or  horizontal 
weaving,  but  reserved  for  the  diagonal  weaving.  Into  each 
corner  hole  the  ends  of  the  two  centre  diagonals  pass,  and 


124 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


the   succeeding  ones  into  consecutive  holes  on  the  sides, 
front  and  back. 

Begin  at  bottom  left-hand  corner,  and  pass  over 
horizontal  and  "lift  up  "  all  vertical  strands,  working  from 
corner  to  corner.  The  ends  are  passed  down  into  the  holes 
and  secured  with  wooden  pegs. 


FIG.  108. 

In  reversing  the  diagonal  weaving,  proceed  in  the  same 
way,  starting  from  right-hand  corner  and  "lifting  up"  all 
the  horizontal  strands.  Remember  to  make  the  two  central 
crossings  finish  in  the  corner  holes.  By  so  doing  the 
diagonals  will  come  out  in  a  direct  line  to  each  hole  on  the 
sides.  There  are  two  or  three  holes  up  the  sides  that 
cannot  be  woven  under ;  these  must  be  missed. 

N.B. — The  two  centre  diagonals  which  pass  into  the  same 
corner  hole  mean  two  adjoining  strands  going  across  the  centre 
of  the  chair. 


CHAIR-CANING  125 

Pegging. — Split  firewood  into  pieces  the  size  of  one's 
little  finger,  and  scrape  round.  The  pegs  must  be  a  little 
larger  than  the  hole,  and  it  is  best  to  use  the  long  piece  as 
it  is,  and  wedge  and  hammer  into  every  two  holes  and 
break  off  until  the  piece  is  used  up.  This  way  is  found  to 
answer  better  than  by  cutting  the  pegs  into  short  lengths. 


FIG.  109. 

When  the  holes  have  been  pegged  in  this  way,  the  punch 
must  be  used  and  a  tap  of  the  hammer  given  to  each  peg  to 
thrust  it  below  the  level  of  the  chair  and  render  the  surface 
neat  and  intact.  If  the  chair  is  to  be  finished  with  a 
beading,  then  every  third  hole  must  be  left  unpegged. 
The  pegging  not  only  secures  the  ends,  but  tightens  the 
work.  The  cane  work  should  be  thoroughly  wetted  before 
pegging. 


126 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


Beading. — A  coarse  cane,  No.  5,  is  suitable  for  beading. 
Measure  off  approximately  the  length  required  to  go  straight 
round  the  chair.  Soak  and  scrape 
the  cane.  Begin  at  the  top  corner 
hole  at  the  back,  pass  the  end  of 
the  beading  cane  into  the  corner 
hole  and  temporarily  secure  it 
with  a  wooden  pegger.  Take  a 
long  length  of  fine  cane  for  the 
threading,  and  pass  it  up  through 
the  first  hole  on  the  side  which 
was  left  unpegged.  Fasten  the 
end  on  under  side  with  a  knot. 
Bring  the  beading  cane  smoothly 
and  flatly  down  from  corner  hole 
to  the  threader,  pull  tightly,  and 
pass  the  threader  over  the  beading 
down  through  the  same  hole  again. 
Pass  the  threader  underneath  to 
next  unpegged  hole,  and  continue 
to  loop  over  the  beading  cane  all 
round  the  chair  through  every  unpegged  hole.  The  beading 
cane  must  be  all  in  one  piece  and  nicely  rounded  at  the  front 
corners.  It  is  finished  off  in  the  same  hole  where  it  began, 
and  is  secured  by  a  peg.  The  under  side  of  the  chair 
should  present  a  neat  appearance,  all  ends  and  knots  after 
pegging  being  cut  away. 


FIG.  110. 


SPLIT  STRAW  WEAVING 

Description   Of   Occupation. — This  occupation  is  an 
admirable  one  to  supplement  mat-plaiting,  and  is  desirable 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING  127 

to  have  going  side  by  side  with  it,  as  a  reward  for  the 
most  diligent  and  careful.  It  cannot  be  recommended  for 
a  large  class  of  infants,  as  it  requires  a  certain  amount  of 
care  and  skill,  and  does  not  admit  of  teaching  upon ;  but  as 
an  occupation  for  older  children  of  Standards  I.  and  II.  it 
cannot  be  too  highly  recommended,  because  these  children 
will  be  au  fait  with  numerous  patterns  in  weaving  and 
need  no  teaching  on  that  point,  and  their  attention  can  be 
wholly  directed  to  the  new  difficulty  of  handling  straw. 
The  occupation  is  very  fascinating  and  one  much  liked  by 
children. 

Educational  Value  of  Occupation. — It  trains  the 

"hand"  to  be  skilful  and  dexterous,  and  the  "eye"  to 
be  exact  and  accurate.  It  cultivates  a  taste  for  designing 
patterns  and  the  harmonious  blending  of  colours.  It  is  a 
development  of  Kindergarten  knowledge  already  acquired, 
and  is  a  clean  and  inexpensive  occupation.  The  work  can 
be  made  any  size  and  cut  to  any  shape,  and  is  durable  and 
suitable  for  making  useful  articles. 

Material  used. — The  straw  used  is  the  ordinary  corn 
stalk  or  reed.  The  stalks  are  sold  in  bundles  of  100  at 
4|d.  per  bundle,  much  used  for  straw  plaiting,  an  industry 
which  is  largely  carried  on  in  Bedfordshire  and  the 
adjoining  counties. 

Very  superior  straw  is  produced  in  Italy  from  the  fine 
corn  cultivated  there  for  macaroni.  If  this  kind  can  be 
obtained  very  delicate  and  artistic  work  can  be  produced, 
as  the  straw  is  of  a  finer  grain  and  whiter  colour. 

Manufacturers  sell  the  straws  ready  dyed  in  the 
following  colours  : — Crimson,  gold,  light  blue,  dark  blue; 
purple,  green,  brown,  and  plain  cream.  Any  of  these 
colours  will  harmonise  well  with  the  undyed  straw. 

le  Straw. — The  straws  may  also  be  obtained  in 


128  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

bundles  ready  split,  but  if  bought  whole  the  splitting  can 
easily  be  done  by  the  children,  and  form  a  preliminary 
lesson  to  the  weaving.  The  splitting  entails  a  certain 
amount  of  waste,  because  the  straws  are  brittle  and  will 
easily  break  if  not  carefully  handled.  To  split  straws 
successfully  the  bundle  should  be  placed  on  end  over 
steam,  until  the  straws  become  somewhat  softened,  when 
they  are  easily  split  and  flattened  without  much  loss.  A 
great  objection  to  steaming  and  wetting  the  straw  is  that 
it  is  likely  to  change  colour  and  turn  from  a  pale  cream  to 
a  butter  yellow.  With  care  the  splitting  can  be  managed 
without. 

Method  fOP  Splitting1.— Implement  for  children— a 
knitting  needle.  Implement  for  teacher — a  penknife. 

Give  each  child  six  straws  and  a  knitting  needle,  and 
interest  the  children  in  their  new  work  by  talking  about 
the  straw — where  it  comes  from,  how  it  is  used,  etc., — and 
show  the  class  some  finished  work  in  straw  weaving  to  give 
them  an  idea  of  what  is  expected  of  them,  and  create  a 
desire  to  do  likewise. 

First  demonstrate  the  splitting  and  flattening  before  the 
children,  and  make  all  intently  watch  and  describe  what  is 
being  done,  then  with  the  following  simple  drill  let  the 
children  repeat  the  process. 

Commands.  —  1.  Take  straw  in  left  hand  and  hold 
upright. 

2.  Take  knitting  needle  in  right  hand. 

3.  Insert  the  point  of   needle  into  the  tube  of  straw 
at  the  top  and  draw  it  quickly  down  the  side. 

4.  Hold  the  straw  on  desk  with  left  hand  and  flatten 
both   sides   with    the   knitting    needle,  until    all  curl  has 
disappeared. 

During  this  lesson  the  teacher  should  pass  round  the 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VI NG  129 

class,  collecting  all  good  flattened  straws,  which  she  should 
at-  once  place  in  a  box  and  keep  ready  for  future  use. 
English  straws  split  in  this  way  are  about  three-quarters 
of  an  inch  wide,  but  the  straws  may  be  split  in  half  for 
small  patterns.  A  straw  splitter  is  the  correct  thing  to  use 
and  may  be  bought  for  a  few  pence,  but  if  the  teacher  has 
time  she  can  quickly  cut  the  straws  down  in  half  with  her 
penknife  and  give  to  the  children  to  flatten. 

Preparation  by  the  Teacher.— To  make  this  occu- 
pation suitable  for  class  work,  the  writer  uses  the 
following  simple  clip  for  holding  the  straws,  which  the 
teacher  must  prepare  herself,  until  Kindergarten  publishers 
come  to  the  rescue  with  something  better  : l- 

Buy  one  yard  fine  muslin  or  Victoria  lawn  and  paste  it 
evenly  upon  a  large  sheet  of  cartridge  or  brown  paper,  so 
as  to  render  the  latter  untearable.  When  dry,  cut  the 
fortified  sheet  into  strips  2  inches  wide.  Subdivide  these 
into  lengths  of  8,  10,  or  12  inches,  according  to  the  size 
of  the  weaving  required.  Remember  the  clip  must  be  cut  2 
inches  longer  than  the  width  of  the  piece  of  work  required. 

Take  each  slip  and  pencil  off  1  inch  from  either 
end.  The  intermediate  part  divide  equally  into  three  parts, 
and  with  a  sharp  penknife  and  ruler  cut  two  slits  from 
pencil  line  to  pencil  line  (see  Fig.  111).  The  clip  should  be 
consistently  stiff  and  yet  pliable  and  untearable,  and  one 
or  two  must  be  provided  for  each  child.  Start  with 
making  small  pieces,  and  cut  up  a  stiff  blue  Kindergarten 
No.  III.  mat  for  the  clips.  This  work  should  be  kept  upon 
sheets  of  cardboard  or  millboard,  and  the  same  collected, 
entire,  each  time  and  placed  one  upon  the  other  until 
finished. 

1  Messrs.  Spicer  and  Co.  of  19  New  Bridge  Street  supply  the  above 
clips  in  three  sizes  for  this  work. 


130  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Methodof  Weaving1.— Materials  for  cachChild.—l.  Two 
paper  clips  (as  described). 

2.  A  long  plaiting  needle  or  wooden  lath  or  knitting 
pin. 

3.  A  millboard  or  sheet  of  cardboard. 

4.  A  dozen  split  straws  ready  flattened. 

Each  child  takes  his  clips  and  places  them  together 
vertically  before  him,  and  then  interlaces  the  straws  in  the 
four  centre  strips  as  if  plaiting  an  ordinary  mat.  Let  children 
push  the  straws  well  through  the  two  clips  and  keep  close 
together  until  all  the  space  is  filled,  simply  weaving  "  one 
up  and  one  down,"  and  then  reversing  the  process. 

This  done,  turn  the  filled  clips  horizontally  and  secure 
the  two  ends  of  top  clip  to  the  millboard  with  two  drawing 
pins,  or  if  ordinary  cardboard,  pin  or  sew  with  a  few  stitches. 
By  using  the  cardboard  or  millboard  each  child's  work  can 
be  labelled  and  protected  from  breakage,  which  would  occur 
if  collected  unattached. 

The  second  clip  must  be  gently  drawn  down  and  the 
straws  also  pulled  down  to  the  top  edge  of  the  clip  ready  for 
the  weaving.  This  stage  represents  the  Kindergarten  mat, 
and  if  desired  the  lower  ends  of  the  straws  may  be  fixed  to 
the  board,  as  in  Fig.  Ill,  but  it  is  found  much  easier  to 
manage  if  the  lower  clip  is  left  loose.  Any  pattern  can 
now  be  woven. 

The  Needle. — There  is  no  needle  suitable  for  the  wide 
straws,  but  one  might  easily  be  made  of  wood,  steel,  or 
cardboard,  with  a  pointed  end  for  "picking  up  "  the  straws, 
and  a  slit  or  spring  at  the  other  end  in  which  to  insert 
the  strip.  The  children  use  the  long  wooden  plaiting 
laths  or  knitting  pins  to  raise  the  straws,  and  when  the 
whole  are  "  up "  correctly  the  straw  is  slipped  in  at  the 
side  and  the  lath  or  pin  withdrawn,  whilst  the  straw  is 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VI NG 


pushed  up  into  place.  The  ordinary  steel  plaiting  needle 
is  useful  for  the  narrow  straws,  and  a  wide  one  made 
upon  a  similar  principle  is  now  manufactured  by  Mr.  T. 
Canner  of  Leicester  for  this  work. 

Joining  or  enlarging  the  Work. — It  sometimes  happens  that 


si^Tr 


FIG.  ill. 

a  straw  will  get  snapped  off  or  used  up ;  if  so,  a  new  one 
is  easily  added.  Take  a  new  straw  of  same  size  as  broken 
one,  and  with  penknife  or  needle  just  lift  the  loop  of  the 
last  cross  straw  above  and  push  up  the  new  straw  until  the 
end  below  corresponds  in  length  to  the  others.  Let  the 
upper  end  remain  outside  and  go  on  weaving,  and  after  a  few 
rows  gradually  draw  the  new  straw  down  until  the  end  is 


132  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

concealed  by  the  cross  loop  under  which  it  was  pushed. 
No  joins  should  show,  nor  the  work  be  impaired  in  the 
slightest,  by  the  addition  of  new  straws.  The  work  can 
be  enlarged  in  the  same  way  on  either  side  if  needed.  Turn 
the  work  and  insert  new  straws  into  the  last  cross  loop  of 
the  weaving,  as  before  described. 

Cut  off  all  ends  underneath,  after  the  new  straws  are 
secure.  Keep  the  straws  well  pushed  together,  not  over- 
lapping, and  yet  no  spaces  left  in  the  corners  of  the  pattern. 
When  the  board  is  full  the  straws  should  be  pulled  gently 
down  from  the  clip,  as  the  weaving  will  now  keep  the 
whole  intact. 

How  to  Utilise. — Decide  upon  the  object  to  be  made  and 
cut  the  shape  out  in  cardboard.  From  time  to  time  lay 
pattern  upon  the  work  to  see  if  large  enough,  and  if  it  is 
then  remove  the  straw  weaving  from  the  millboard,  cut  oft' 
all  untidy  ends  at  back,  and  lay  with  glazed  side  down- 
wards. 

Use  prepared  paste  or  gloy,  and  paste  over  the  card- 
board shape.  Place  it  in  position  on  the  wrong  side  of 
weaving  and  cover  with  a  millboard  (to  keep  flat),  and  a 
heavy  weight  on  top.  This  process  gives  a  beautiful 
flatness  to  the  work  and  enhances  its  beauty.  When  dry 
cut  the  straw  work  to  the  cardboard  shape.  Finish  the 
edges  either  by  binding  them  with  ribbon  or  braid,  or  better 
still,  by  edging  them  with  a  row  of  straw -plait  vandyke 
edging. 

Manufacturers  and  Price  List. — Coloured  straws,  red, 
blue,  green,  gold,  brown,  and  white,  are  sold  at  Church 
Extension  Depot,  5  and  6  Paternoster  Kow,  at  4  id.  per 
100,  and  vandyke  edging,  8d.  per  bundle  of  20  yards. 
Superior  coloured  straws  in  art  shades  are  sold  at  Wakeford 
Bros.,  King's  Road,  Chelsea;  and  at  Higgins  and  Co.,  George 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VI NG 


133 


Street,  Luton,  at  9d.  and  lOd.  per  bundle ;  and  mixed 
Vandyke  edgings  to  match  at  Is.  per  bundle  of  about  twenty 
yards.  Plain  white  Vandyke  lOd.  per  bundle. 


SLIPPER  POCKET 

Materials.  —  1.  Ordinary 
stiff  paper,  Mat  No.  III.,  cut 
up  into  clips. 

2.  Split   brown   and   cream 
straws,  \  inch. 

3.  Steel  Kindergarten  plait- 
ing needle. 

Method.  —  These  small 
articles  are  best  for  beginners, 
because  they  have  their  Kinder- 
garten needle  and  mat  as  helps. 
Insert  the  cream  strips  and 
weave  with  brown.  No  joins 
will  be  necessary,  as  the  length 
of  the  straw  will  cut  the  sole 
of  slipper,  and  another  portion 
must  be  woven  for  the  toe. 
Two  slippers  alike  must  be 
made  and  tied  together  in  pairs. 
They  are  useful  for  hanging 
on  the  toilet  glass,  to  hold  hair- 
combings.  Cut  two  shapes 
according  to  measurements  in 
Fig.  113.  The  toe  cap  to  be 
4^  inches  at  its  widest  part  and  3J  inches  long.  Paste  and 
flatten  as  before  directed  and  finish  off  with  small  vandyke 
edgings. 


FIG.  112.— Slipper  Pocket. 


134 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


Some  of  the  edgings  now  made  are  in  mixtures  of  cream 
and  red,  green  and  cream,  and  red  and  green ;  and  if  the 


Fio.  113 

weaving  corresponds  in  colour,  most  delicate  and  artistic 
work  is  produced. 

DINNER  MATS 

There  are  six  dinner  mats  to  a  set — two  large,  12x9 
inches;  two  medium,  10x8  inches;  and  two  small,  9  x  7  inches. 
It  is  best  to  decide  beforehand  what  is  to  be  made,  and  cut 
the  cardboard  shape  out  first,  so  that  a  child  knows  exactly 
what  is  required  of  him  and  will  take  greater  interest  in 
his  work.  Let  the  whole  class  be  at  the  same  employment 
at  the  same  lesson  because  change  is  desirable,  and  for  one 
child  to  make  a  whole  set  of  dinner  mats  would  be 
monotonous.  It  requires  twelve  pieces  of  weaving  for  a 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  V1NG 


135 


set,  and  this  might  be  obtained  in  one  lesson  if  the  work  is 
given  out  properly  prepared. 

Cream  or  plain  undyed  straws  arc  best  for  dinner  mats, 
because  they  do  not  fade  with  the  heat  of  the  dishes,  and 
are  easily  sponged  and  kept  fresh. 

Materials  required.— 1.  Six  stout  cardboard  shapes- 
two,  12x9  inches ;  two,  10x8  inches  ;  two,  9x7  inches,  of 
an  oval  shape. 


FIG.  114.— Dinner  Mat. 

2.  Plain  white  straws  split  open,  J  inch  wide. 

3.  Straw  clip  made  in  three  sizes  (as  described). 

4.  Thin  lath  or  needle  for  lifting  up  straws. 
Method. — Cut  the  clips  2  inches  longer  than  width  of 

mat,  which  will  be  11,  10,  and  9  inches.  Let  each  child 
interlace  its  own  straws  in  the  clip,  and  when  full,  the 
teacher  should  fasten  same  securely  to  a  millboard  or  piece 
of  stout  cardboard.  For  first  lesson,  give  the  simple 


136  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

pattern,  one  up  and  one  down,  until  the  children  have 
overcome  the  difficulty  of  treating  with  the  brittle  straw. 

The .  oval  cardboard  shapes  must  be  cut  with  mathe- 
matical precision.  This  is  best  obtained  by  using  a  loop 
of  string  and  two  drawing  pins,  and  inscribing  the  ellipse 
with  the  loop  of  string  and  a  pencil. 

How  to  draw  the  Ellipse. — Make  a  double  loop  of  string  the 
length  of  mat.  Knot  together.  Draw  a  pencil  line  upon 
cardboard  the  exact  length  of  mat,  and  fix  a  drawing  pin 


FIG.  115. 


about  half  an  inch  from  either  end  of  this  line.  Place  the  loop 
of  string  over  the  two  pins.  Hold  pencil  nearly  upright  with 
point  inside  the  loop  and  thus  describe  the  ellipse,  keeping 
the  string  tightly  strained  from  drawing  pins  (see  Fig.  115). 

When  each  piece  of  weaving  is  the  size  required,  let  the 
straws  be  gently  urged  towards  the  centre  from  top  and 
bottom  and  sides.  If  the  work  be  not  wide  enough,  it  can 
be  turned  round  and  new  straws  inserted  just  the  same  as 
at  the  bottom,  and  be  widened  or  lengthened  to  any 
extent. 

Collect  all  the  work  when  finished  and  keep  between  the 
leaves  of  an  old  summary  or  register  till  mounting  day. 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING  137 

From  experience  it  is  found  best  to  have  a  quantity 
mounted  and  finished  off  together.  Some  of  the  most 
careful  children  may  be  chosen  from  time  to  time  for  this 
part  of  the  work,  and  they  will  do  the  pasting  of  the 
cardboard  efficiently ;  but  the  teacher  should  lay  the  straw 
work  in  position,  and  then  let  the  child  smooth  and  press 
with  a  piece  of  blotting-paper  until  the  work  has  partially 
adhered.  It  should  then  be  replaced  with  its  cardboard  shape 
in  the  large  book,  or  between  millboards,  and  left  all  night 
with  a  heavy  weight  upon  the  top.  This  will  ensure  a 
beautiful  flatness,  which  cannot  be  got  by  any  other  means, 
and  has  always  brought  forth  remark  at  the  work  produced 
in  the  writer's  school. 

Finishing.—  If  older  children  than  six  years  take  this 
work,  the  whole  may  be  finished  by  the  children,  but  if 
infants  of  six  years  take  it,  the  finishing  had  better  be  done 
by  the  teacher,  especially  where  stout  cardboard  forms  the 
foundation,  because  the  needles  broken  are  a  source  of 
trouble,  and  the  little  hands  are  not  strong  enough  to  push 
through  such  a  firm  thickness.  Dinner  mats  may  be 
bound  with  braid  or  strips  of  American  cloth,  but  to  give 
the  best  finish  to  the  mat,  nothing  excels  the  straw  Vandyke 
edging  sold  for  the  purpose.  This  is  sewn  on  both  sides, 
so  that  either  side  of  the  mat  can  be  used. 

The  two  sides  might  be  woven  in  different  colours  if 
desired,  or  different  patterns  to  give  variety  to  the 
work. 

Crimson  and  cream  are  colours  which  go  well  together, 
and  two  up  and  two  down,  starting  one  strip  to  the  left 
each  time,  gives  a  very  pretty  step  pattern  and  yet  easy 
to  do. 

Tie  all  the  six  mats  together  with  coloured  ribbon  to 
match  the  straws,  and  sell  as  a  set. 


I38  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


BLOTTER 

Materials  required.— 1.  Blue  and  cream  straws  split 
open,  J  inch  wide. 


^\r-=^IIW^^,Bl'I^J«I^.^^^HII^^II»i.,r^l«=-JJB^^J|'h 


FIG.  116.— Blotter. 

2.  Paper  clips,  1  2  inches  long. 

3.  Navy  blue  morocco  paper. 

4.  Two  stout  pieces  of  cardboard,  12x10  inches. 
Method.— Two    pieces    of   weaving,    blue    and    cream, 

measuring    12   by   11    inches    each,  are  required   for   the 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING  139 

outside  covers.  Eighteen  cream  straws  are  interwoven 
into  the  clip,  to  form  the  mat,  and  twelve  blue  straws  of 
same  width  are  plaited  "  one  up  and  one  down  "  across  the 
cream  straws,  reversing  every  alternate  row.  See  that  the 
straws  are  well  pushed  up  and  form  exact  squares  of  blue 
and  cream. 

The  cardboard  mounts  must  now  be  cut.  Stout  card- 
board is  the  best  to  use.  Eule  a  line  down  the  cardboard 
edges  and  be  careful  that  the  lines  are  straight,  then  cut 
accurately  with  ruler  and  sharp  knife. 

When  all  ends  underneath,  caused  through  joining, 
have  been  cut  off,  and  the  weaving  neatly  pasted  to  the 
cardboard  mounts,  then  lay  one  upon  the  other,  with  paper 
between,  and  place  under  a  heavy  weight,  or  better  still,  in 
a  press. 

Binding. — To  join  the  two  covers  together,  and  form  a 
hinge  at  the  back  of  book,  take  some  unbleached  calico 
and  cut  a  strip  precisely  the  length  of  the  covers  and  2 
inches  wide,  so  that  it  will  wrap  over  well  on  each  cover. 
Lay  the  two  covers  side  by  side,  almost  touching,  and  paste 
the  strip  down  the  back  edges,  on  the  weaving  side.  It 
is  best  to  do  this  and  leave  to  dry,  as  it  holds  the  blotter 
strongly  together  when  finishing  it. 

The  Inside. — Line  the  inside  with  the  morocco  paper  and 
bind  the  edges.  To  do  this  turn  covers,  with  cardboard  side 
uppermost,  and  cut  enough  paper  to  cover  both  sides  of  the 
blotter,  and  to  allow  for  the  bind.  This  inner  lining  should  be 
about  one  inch  larger  than  the  book  on  every  side,  except  the 
back,  where  it  goes  straight  across  the  hinge  back.  Paste 
it  on  very  evenly  and  smooth  out  any  lumps  of  paste  by 
using  the  hand  in  preference  to  a  brush.  Be  sure  that  the 
outer  edges  of  the  paper  are  straight,  and  when  the  inside 
is  pasted,  turn  covers  and  fold  over  the  edges  upon  the  right 


140  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

side  where  they  should  lie  evenly,  and  make  a  good  binding 
for  the  edges. 

Corners. — Take  care  to  turn  the  corners  sharply  by 
snipping  out  a  portion  so  that  they  are  not  bulky. 

If  the  corners  are  not  good  paste  across  four  corner 
pieces  of  paper.  Before  finishing  the  back  it  is  perhaps 
best  to  fasten  in  the  blotting-paper.  Make  four  holes 
right  through  the  sheets  of  paper  and  the  calico  back, 
two  in  the  middle  and  the  other  two  about  one  and  a 
half  inches  on  either  side.  Stitch  the  blotting-paper 
through  these  holes  two  or  three  times  with  strong  thread, 
or  another  way  is  to  fasten  a  piece  of  elastic  over  the 
back  and  inside  of  book  and  slip  the  leaves  underneath. 
This  latter  method  is  good  for  easily  changing  the  paper 
when  required,  but  the  first  plan  is  the  better  for  making 
scrap-books,  etc.  When  this  process  is  complete,  the  book 
is  ready  to  bind  ;  take  a  strip  of  morocco  paper  of  the  same 
width  as  the  first  strip  of  calico,  and  paste  it  upon  the 
other  at  the  edges  only,  so  that  the  elastic  can  be  slipped 
in  or  out,  and  the  stitches  hidden. 

Decoration. — The  book  may  be  decorated  with  bows  of 
ribbon  back  and  front,  or  edged  with  straw  Vandyke  edging 
over  the  binding,  which  will  greatly  improve  it,  but  be  more 
expensive. 

PHOTO  FRAME 

Materials  required.— 1.  Cream  and  gold  straws,  split 
in  half,  J  inch  width. 

2.  Paper  clip,  11  inches. 

3.  Stout  piece  of  cardboard,  10x8  inches. 

4.  Ordinary  steel  plaiting  needle. 

Method. — The  cream  straws  form  the  foundation,  and 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING 


141 


thirty-two  half  straws  are  interlaced  into  the  clip.  The 
gold  straws  are  of  same  width  and  are  woven  in  horizontally 
one  up  and  one  down,  but  they  are  not  pushed  tightly  up 
to  form  squares.  The  reverse  process  is  adopted,  i.e.  the 


FIG.  117.- Photo  Frame. 

cream  straws  are  kept  rigidly  together,  and  therefore 
keep  the  gold  farther  away,  giving  the  appearance  of 
cream  oblongs  and  gold  squares. 

The  size  of  piece  required  is  10  inches  long  by  8  inches 
wide. 


142 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


Cut  out  with  sharp  penknife  the  cardboard  shape, 
according  to  measurements  given  in  Fig.  118,  and  cut  out 
the  centre  (3x4  inches)  at  the  same  time. 

Paste  the  cardboard  shape  on  weaving  and  leave  under 
weight  till  quite  dry. 

Next  cut  edges  close,  and  carefully  cut  away  the  straw 


8inches. 
FIG.  118. 

work  which  covers  the  open  centre.  Snip  this  first  in  the 
very  centre  and  gradually  cut  to  the  cardboard  edge. 
Immediately  finish  the  edges  by  sewing  on  a  narrow 
vandyke  edging,  first  round  the  centre,  then  the  outside 
border. 

Next  cut  another  piece  of  cardboard  of  same  size  but 
with  centre  intact.  Cover  one  side  of  it  with  morocco 
paper,  and  the  other  side  paste  to  the  back  of  frame. 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING 


143 


Leave  the  bottom  impasted  so  that  a  photo  and  glass  can 
be  slipped  up  between.  Screw  in  a  small  ring  at  the  top 
to  suspend  the  frame,  or  add  a  triangular  piece  of  cardboard 
in  the  centre  of  back,  with  a  strip  of  morocco  leather  paper, 


FIG.  119.  —Circular  Pocket. 

which  will  act  as  a  hinge  and  allow  the  frame  to  stand  on 
a  table. 

CIRCULAR  POCKET 

Materials   required.— 1.    Straws   gold  and  brown, 

half  width. 


144 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


2.  Two  circles  cardboard,  7-inch  and  8-inch  diameter. 

3.  Straw  clip,  10  inches,  8-inch  slits. 

4.  Vandyke  edging,  narrow. 

Method. — This  is  a  very  easy  article  to  make  and  can 
well  be  copied  from  the  diagram  and  measurements 
given. 

Two  pieces  of  weaving,  8  inches  square,  are  needed. 


FIG.  120. 

Cut  and  paste  one  circle  of  7-inch  diameter  for  back 
of  pocket,  and  the  other  circle  must  be  one  inch  larger  to 
allow  it  to  bend  outwards.  Cut  this  second  circle  in  half- 
moon  shape  and  fix  to  lower  part  of  the  first  circle.  Finish 
the  two  together  with  Vandyke  edging  and  make  the  back 
neat  by  covering  with  a  circle  of  leather  paper.  Add  bows 
of  ribbon  if  desired.  Save  all  cuttings  of  straw  of  2  inches 
or  more  in  length,  as  they  will  be  useful  for  flowers  in  a 
later  lesson. 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING 


BOAT  COTTON  BASKET 

Materials  required.— 1.  Straws  green  and  gold,  split 
in  half. 

2.  Clips  of  7  inches,  and  slits  5  inches  (Mat  III.) 

3.  Ordinary  mat-weaving  needle. 

4.  Sheet  of  Bristol  cardboard. 


FIG.  121.— Boat  Cotton  Basket. 

5.  Medium  width  vandyke  edging. 

6.  Old  gold  sateen  for  lining,  \  yard,  and  ribbon. 
Method.  —  This  useful  article  is  very  simple  to  make, 

as  the  pieces  needed  are  not  of  any  great  size,  and  therefore 
are  quickly  done.  First  cut  the  three  sides  in  Bristol 
cardboard,  according  to  the  measurements  given  in  diagram. 
Set  three  children  to  weave  the  three  pieces  alike  needed 
for  one  basket.  Interlace  twenty-four  green  straws  of  half 

L 


I46 


VARIED  OCCUPA  T1ONS  IN  WE  A  VING 


size  into  each  of 'the  three  clips,  and  weave  with  the  gold 
straws.  Three  pieces  of  weaving  10x5  inches  are  needed 
for  the  basket.  Paste  each  piece  to  cardboard  shapes  and 
finish  with  vandyke  edging,  separately,  before  joining  to- 
gether. When  each  piece  is  complete,  slip-stitch  the  edges 
together  to  the  shape  of  illustration. 

Make  a  bag  10  inches  wide  for  the  inside,  and  catch  the 
corners  to  the  corners  of  basket,  and  then  to  the  top.     Draw 


FIG.  122. 


the  bag  together  by  double  strings  of  ribbon,  pulling  right 
and  left. 


OCTAGONAL  NEEDLE-BOOK  AND  HEART  PIN-CUSHION 

These  small  articles  may  be  made  with  the  fine  pieces 
which  will  frequently  come  off  when  splitting  the  straw. 
These  should  be  saved  and  kept  in  a  separate  box,  and 
when  sufficient  have  accumulated,  small  needle-books  or 
pin-cushions  should  be  made  with  them. 

Materials  required.— 1.  Fine  straw  splits,  \  inch  wide. 

2.  Ordinary  plaiting  needle. 

3.  Straw  clip,  5  inches,  made  of  strips  of  Mat  III. 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING 


147 


4.  Square  of  cardboard,  4  inches. 

Method. — Two  squares  of  weaving  3|x3J  inches  are 
needed  to  cut  the  octagons  for  the  two  covers.  Interlace 
thirty  fine  cream  straws  in  clip  close  together,  and  weave 
with  twelve  red  straws  the  simple  pattern  of  one  up  and  one 
down.  The  foundation  straws  are  kept  close  together,  thus 
preventing  the  red  from  being  quite  pushed  up,  as  in  the 
previous  weaving  for  photo  frame. 

Take  drawing  compass  and  geometrically  describe  an 


FIG.  123.— Octagonal  Needle-book. 

octagon  of  3 \ -inch  diameter.  Cut  two  of  exact  size  in 
Bristol  cardboard,  and  paste  to  the  wrong  side  of  weaving. 
Bind  the  edges  with  narrow  crimson  ribbon,  and  cut  four 
or  six  octagonal  pieces  of  red  or  white  flannel  for  the  inside. 
Make  these  slightly  smaller  than  the  covers,  and  snip  the 
edges.  Fasten  them  through  the  back  of  covers  with 
darning  needle  and  narrow  ribbon,  and  finish  with  bow. 

Follow  the  same  directions  for  heart  pin-cushion.  The 
two  sides  are  laid  together  with  a  layer  of  flannel  or  cloth 
between.  The  edges  are  separately  bound,  and  afterwards 
neatly  sewn  together  with  sewing  silk  of  same  colour  as 


148 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


ribbon.  When  finished  attach  small  bows  at  top,  and  place 
pins  J  inch  apart  all  round  the  apex  of  heart.  A  child  of 
seven  years  can  entirely  make  these  small  articles. 


Fia.  124. — Heart  Pin-cushion. 


TOILET  TIDY 
Materials  required. — 1.  Blue  and  white  split  straws, 

\  inch  wide. 

2.  Clip,  11  inches  wide. 

3.  Bristol  cardboard. 

4.  Kindergarten  steel  needle. 

Method. — Split  all  straws  in  half  and  flatten.  Interlace 
forty-two  cream  straws  into  clip  for  foundation  mat  and 
interweave  the  blue  straws  according  to  the  following 
pattern  : — 

First  Boiv. — 1  down,  3  up.     Repeat  to  the  end. 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VI NG  149 

Second  Row. — Same,  only  begin  at  the  second  strip,  and 
thus  keep  the  pattern  one  strip  to  left. 
Third  Row. — Same.     Begin  at  third  strip. 
Now  reverse  the  pattern  and  begin  at  second,  and  then 


FIG.  125.— Toilet  Tidy. 

first  again,  and  so  continue  weaving  three  rows  to  the  left 
and  three  rows  to  the  right,  giving  a  zigzag  pattern. 

Weave  a  piece  about  10x9  inches  for  the  back  of 
pocket,  and  another  piece  10x5  inches  for  the  lower  portion. 
Cut  cardboard  shapes  of  both  pieces  according  to  the 
measurements  given  in  diagram.  Paste  the  shapes  to  the 


150  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

wrong  side  of  weaving  and  leave  under  a  heavy  weight  till 
dry. 

Cut  the  straw  work  to  the  shapes  of  both  pieces. 

First  bind  the  top  of  lower  portion  with  Vandyke  edging 
and  cut  off.  Now  sew  the  circular  part  to  the  bottom  of 

4'/z  inches. 


FIG.  126. 

back  and  bind  both  together.  Continue  the  edging  all 
round  and  finish  with  loop  at  the  top.  If  the  cardboard  is 
not  of  the  best,  cover  it  on  the  wrong  side  with  coloured 
paper. 

HAND-SCREENS 

Materials. — 1.  Gold  straws  and  gold  Vandyke  edging. 

2.  Clip  of  12  inches. 

3.  Blue  straws  for  flowers. 

4.  Stout  cardboard  for  foundation. 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VI NG  151 

Method. — The  groundwork  of  screen  looks  best  woven 


FIG.  127.— Hand-screen. 


in  one  colour,  so  that  the  flowers  form  a  distinct  contrast. 


152 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


The  illustration  is  a  gold  foundation  ornamented  with  a 
spray  of  blue  flowers  and  buds. 

Weave  two  oblong  pieces  with  all  gold  split  straws  12 
inches  broad  and  16  inches  long.  Cut  cardboard  founda- 
tion and  paste  on  one  side  only.  When  pressed  and  dry, 
cut  this  piece  to  shape,  bind  edge  at  once  with  vandyke 


O 


o 


Fio.  128.— Patterns  of  Fans. 

edging  and  mount  the  flowers  in  same  position,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  127.  Then  cover  the  back  with  another  piece  of  weav- 
ing. Cut  to  shape  and  bind  with  vandyke  edging  like 
the  front  side,  only  omit  the  flowers. 

Handle. — For  the  handle,  cut  two  pieces  of  stout  card- 
board 12  inches  long.  Sew  them  on  each  side  of  the  fan, 
starting  from  about  the  middle,  and  keep  them  exactly 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING 


153 


together,  with  the  fan  between.  Fasten  securely  the  two  ends 
which  form  the  handle.  Now  take  some  ivlwle  gold  straws, 
press  them  flat  and  thread  eight  or  nine  together  at  top 
and  bottom,  and  cover  the  cardboard  handle  on  both  sides 
in  this  manner.  Wind  a  straw  round  the  handle  here  and 
there  to  give  neatness  and  support,  and  sew  with  needle 
and  thread. 

These  hand-screens  may  be  cut  of  various  shapes,  and 
all  are  suitable  for  the  work,  and  the  directions  given  are 
applicable  to  all. 

FLOWERS 

How  to  Make.— Many  cuttings  from  the  work  will  be 
found   useful  for  making 
flowers.     Any  split  pieces 
of  2  inches  in  length  will 
do. 

The  straws  are  better  a 
little  damp  for  this  purpose, 
so  roll  the  bits  in  a  wet 
towel  over  night,  or  allow 
a  little  water  in  a  tin  saucer 
to  moisten  the  fingers.  If 
the  straws  are  not  excep- 
tionally stiff  and  brittle, 
simply  breathing  on  the 
unglazed  side  will  be 
sufficient. 

Take  a  straw  2  inches 
long  and  |  inch  wide. 
Double  in  half.  Open. 
Place  forefinger  of  left 
hand  on  crease  of  FlG- 129.— Flower. 


154 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


centre    and    make    oblique    crease    with    right-hand    end, 
thus : — 


FIG.  130  (1). 

Take  left-hand  end  and  fold  down  in  similar  manner  to 
touch  right,  thus  :— 


FIG.  131  (2). 

This  is  one  petal  of  the  flower.  About  twenty  or  more 
of  these  are  required  according  to  the  size  of  flower  to  be 
made.  When  a  sufficient  number  for  flowers  are  folded, 
provide  each  child  with  a  needle  and  waxed  thread,  and  a 
small  square  of  stout  brown  paper,  not  easily  torn. 

The  two  ends  of  each  petal  are  crossed  just  at  the 
extremity  and  threaded  carefully  on  the  needle,  four  only 
at  one  time.  As  each  four  are  threaded  they  must  be  sewn 
on  to  the  small  cardboard  disc,  and  radiated  regularly,  as 
in  Fig.  133  (4).  The  small  space  in  centre  is  filled  by  a 


SPLIT  STRA  W  WE  A  VING 


155 
-to 


crumpled  straw  of  another  colour — in  this  case  gold 
match  the  foundation  colour  of  screen. 

Buds  need  only  two  or  four  petals,  according  to  the  size, 
and  are  finished  off  by  a  cross  straw,  with  the  ends  turned 
underneath. 


FIG.  132  (3).  Fio.  133  (4). 

Stems. — Whole  straws  are  used  for  stems,  of  same 
colour  as  the  petals.  To  make  them  bend  in  position,  a 
fine  wire  is  passed  up  inside  the  straw  and  bent  into  shape, 
after  which  the  stem  is  sewn  to  the  foundation.  A  little 
fine  artificial  grass,  sewn  on  with  the  flowers,  adds  much 
to  the  beauty  of  the  screen  and  removes  the  hardness  which 
the  flowers  otherwise  present. 

A  pliable  strip  of  straw  is  easily  threaded  in  a  darning- 
needle  and  sewn  through  the  weaving  in  long  stitches  to 
represent  leaves.  See  leaf  in  Fig.  127,  near  handle. 

SIMPLE  FLOWERS 

An  easy  way  of  making  flowers  is  the  following : — 
Give  the  children  split  half  straws  about  a  quarter  inch 
wide.     The  straws  need  to  be  damp  for  creasing,  or  a  small 
tin  of  water  might  be  provided  for  each  dual  desk,   in 
which  the  children  can  moisten  their  fingers. 

Take  the  moistened  straw  and  crease  it  at  distances  of  f 


156  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

inch,  always  keeping  the  glazed  side  of  the  straw  uppermost. 
Thread  the  alternate  points  on  a  sewing  needle  and  stitch 
to  a  small*  circular  foundation  as  before  described  for  other 
flowers.  Flowers  may  be  used  to  ornament  the  top  cover 
of  blotters,  or  the  front  of  toilet  tidies  and  pockets.  It  is 


FIG.  134.— Simple  Flowers. 

best  to  let  the  children  practise  making  these  flowers  with 
the  paper-weaving  strips,  and  the  result  will  be  charming, 
and  the  paper  flowers  can  be  utilised  for  paper  decoration. 

FANCY  TABLES  AND  STANDS 

Materials  required.— 1.  Green  and  gold  straws. 

2.  Green  and  gold  straw  plait. 

3.  Green  and  gold  ball  fringe. 

4.  Pale  green  or  yellow  enamel. 

5.  Brass-headed  nails  or  gilt-headed  tin  tacks. 

Straw  work  is  very  suitable  for  the  decoration  of  plain 


FIG.  135.— Fancy  Table  and  Stands. 


158  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

wooden  articles,  and  nowadays,  when  so  many  cheap  and 
artistic  articles  in  plain  wood  are  to  be  had,  perhaps  it 
would  be  as  well  to  describe  how  the  work  may  be  utilised. 
The  sketch  shows  a  pretty  wood  table  which  can  be  bought 
at  any  fancy  depository  in  extensive  variety.  The  first 
thing  to  do  is  to  enamel  the  table.  This  part  may  be  done 
quite  well  by  the  children  under  the  superintendence  of 
the  teacher.  Painting  and  gumming  are  two  occupations 
much  enjoyed  by  children. 

Of  course  the  colour  of  the  enamel  must  harmonise  with 
the  colours  used  in  the  straw  weaving.  Each  tiny  circle  is 
covered  with  the  weaving,  which  may  be  glued  on  with  thin 
glue,  or  tacked  on  with  small  tacks.  Each  circle  is  then 
finished  with  ball  fringe,  made  with  the  same  colours,  green 
and  gold,  to  match  the  colours  of  the  straw.  When  this 
is  done,  ornament  the  edges  by  a  broad  straw  Vandyke  plait 
and  fasten  the  same  on  with  small  brass-headed  nails. 

The  balls  for  the  fringe  may  be  made  by  the  lower 
infants  and  crocheted  together  by  the  teacher. 

The  centre  column  and  legs  may  be  ornamented  with  bows 
of  ribbon  or  a  spiral  twist  of  the  straw  plait,  as  in  Fig.  1 35. 

The  work  is  very  effective,  and  has  almost  the  appear- 
ance of  inlaid  Japanese  work,  and  the  stand  will  be  found 
useful  for  holding  books,  small  .pots  of  ferns,  or  vases  of 
flowers,  photo  frames,  etc.  It  takes  up  little  space  and  may 
be  placed  in  the  corner  of  any  room.  Gipsy  tables,  milk 
stools,  music  stands,  etc.,  can  be  so  ornamented. 

Note. — A  pleasing  variety  to  this  work  is  made  by  substi- 
tuting coloured  ribbons  for  the  foundation,  arranged  as  directed 
in  "  Ribbon  Weaving."  The  straws  are  interlaced  with  the  glazed 
side  downwards,  and  the  work*  pasted  to  the  foundation  before 
it  is  removed  from  the  board.  This  work  can  be  folded  and 
ladies'  music  and  work  cases  made  of  it. 


STRA  W  WE  A  VING  159 

STRAW  WORK 
OXFORD  PICTURE  FRAME 

Materials  required.— 1.  Whole  straws,  12  inches  long. 

2.  Needle  and  cotton. 

3.  Two  yards  of  ribbon,  \  inch  wide. 

Method. — Take  an  uneven  number  of  straws,  3,  5,  7, 
or  9,  according  to  the  width  required,  and  lay  them  side 
by  side,  even  at  the  top  and  bottom.  With  a  long  straw 
needle  thread  through  the  whole  number  about  two  inches 
from  the  end.  Pass  the  needle  back  again  a  little  lower 
down  and  pull  the  straws  close  together  and  fasten  off. 
Do  the  same  at  the  lower  end  of  the  straws  and  then  cut  to 
shape.  The  ends  may  be  cut  straight,  pointed,  oblique, 
or  scooped  out  like  the  tail  of  a  fish.  Each  of  the  four 
sides  must  be  made  in  the  same  way,  after  which  they  are 
crossed  and  sewn  at  the  corners  and  tied  with  bows  of 
ribbon.  The  children  like  making  these  frames,  and  they 
are  very  useful  for  framing  specimens  of  their  work,  and 
make  a  goodly  show  hung  on  the  class  room  walls  on 
examination  day.  Attach  a  small  loop  of  ribbon  at  the 
back  to  suspend  the  picture  frame. 


STRAW  PLAIT  WEAVING 

This  occupation  is  an  inexpensive  one,  yet  very  useful 
and  simple  to  do.  The  straw  plait  is  sold  in  bundles  of 
60  yards  at  6d.  per  bundle,  and  may  be  obtained  in  various 


160  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

colours  and  mixtures,  and  of  different  widths,  of  Mr.  W. 
Higgins,  Luton. 

The  vandyke  edging,  which  is  most  suitable  for  finishing 
off  an  article  rather  than  for  weaving,  is  plaited  according 
to  the  rules  given  under  "Paper  Plaiting,"  and  could  be 
taken  as  a  separate  occupation.  This  plait  is  also  sold  in 
plain  white  and  mixtures  at  Is.  for  20  yards. 

Besides  weaving  entire  articles  with  straw  plait,  it  is 
very  useful  to  introduce  into  the  cane-weaving  articles,  and 
a  few  rows  at  intervals  will  very  much  enhance  the  appear- 
ance of  an  ordinary  cane  basket. 

The  plait  may  be  cut  in  lengths,  and  fixed  upon  the 
points  of  a  weaving  frame,  or  wound  to  and  fro  round 
short  nails  on  a  slate  frame,  or  fixed  in  two  clips,  as  in 
"  Straw  Weaving,"  according  to  the  size  of  the  piece  of  work 
required. 

DINNER  MAT 

Materials  required. — 1.  Oblong  frame,  with  nails  1 
inch  apart. 

2.  Straw  plait,  crimson  mixture,  f  inch  wide. 

3.  Needle  and  thread. 

4.  Crimson  vandyke  edging. 

Plan  Of  Lesson.  —Dinner  mats  of  any  size  or  shape 
may  be  made  in  this  way.  Wind  the  plait  the  long  way 
of  frame,  as  described  in  "  String  Work,"  and  weave  across 
separate  lengths  of  the  plait.  Tack  the  work  all  round  the 
edges  before  removing  from  the  frame.  The  work  will  be 
.sufficiently  firm  and  will  need  no  mounting.  The  edges  must 
be  bound  with  narrow  braid  or  a  strip  of  American  cloth, 
and  then  over  the  stitches  sew  a  vandyke  edging  on  botli 
sides.  The  pieces  for  dinner  mats  are  easily  convertible 


S  TRA  W  PLAIT  WE  A  VI NG  1 6 1 

into  many  pretty,  fancy  baskets,  such  as  the  following 
shapes.  Separate  pieces  as  circles,  half-circles,  and  oblongs 
must  be  woven  and  cut  to  shape  for  the  sides,  then  bound 
round  and  sewn  in. 

HAND  BASKET 
This  hand  basket  is  made  of  a  red  mixture  of  straw 


FIG.  136.— Hand  Basket. 

plait  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch  wide.  The  plait  is  cut 
into  lengths  16  inches  long,  and  fixed  upon  the  points  of 
the  weaving  frame.  Shorter  lengths  of  11  inches  are  then 
woven  across,  and  from  this  piece  of  weaving  an  oval  mat 
16  x  10 1-  inches  is  made.  The  ends  of  the  mat  are  secured 
between  a  double  binding  of  the  plait,  which  is  sewn  round 
the  edge  on  both  sides. 

These  bags,  if  woven  in  plain  white  plait,  may  be  much 
M 


1 62  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

improved  by  ornamenting  the  right  side  "with  a  worked 
spray  of  wool  flowers  or  the  word  "  LONDON." 

Method. — Before  removing  the  piece  from  frame,  tack 
upon  the  weaving  a  simple  outline  drawing  of  leaves  and 
flowers  or  fruit.  The  drawing  may  be  on  cartridge  paper  and 
tacked  in  position  with  needle  and  thread.  The  child  wTill 
fill  the  shape  of  leaves  in  with  long  wool  stitches,  and  with  a 
lighter  shade  of  wool  mark  in  the  midrib  and  veins  of  leaf. 
Fig.  1 36  shows  a  cluster  of  cherries  which  are  produced  from 
the  ball-making  class.  They  are  in  various  shades  of  red 
according  to  their  degree  of  ripeness,  and  are  caught  down 
to  basket.  The  stem  is  brown,  and  worked  in  a  kind  of 
back  stitch.  This  embroidery  is  best  done  on  the  frame 
and  the  needle  passed  through  the  weaving  up  and  down. 
When  finished  tear  away  the  paper  drawing,  remove  the 
work  from  frame  and  finish  basket  to  the  required  shape. 

Two  oblong  pieces  are  woven  and  cut  to  shape  for  the 
sides,  and  the  bag  finished  with  two  handles  made  of 
double  pieces  of  plait. 

These  baskets  are  easily  made  and  varied  in  shape.  A 
straight  oblong  piece  can  be  rolled  round  with  two  circles 
for  the  ends,  and  thus  a  music  case  or  lady's  knitting  basket 
may  be  made.  The  upper  flap  fastens  over  upon  the  under 
one  with  two  buttons  and  elastic  loops. 

The  basket  in  Fig.  136  could  be  made  with  straight 
sides  instead  of  round. 


STRAW  PLAIT   WORK 
LETTP:R-MAKING 

To  prevent  waste  of  material,  which  must  occur  if  the 
short  lengths  and  cuttings  be  not  used,  the  following  plan 


STRA  W  PLAIT  WORK  163 

will  be  found  advantageous  for  using  up  such  pieces,  and 
the  occupation  might  form  a  very  suitable  one  for  a  lower 
class  : — 

Materials  required. — 1.  Hektograph  copy  of  letter. 

2.  Piece  of  ribbon  wire. 

3.  Length  of  straw  plait. 

4.  Needle  and  cotton  and  paper  scissors. 

Method  of  Lesson. — Distribute  to  the  class  a  hekto- 
graph  copy  of  the  letter  to  be  made,  e.g.  "  S,"  and  the  paper 
upon  which  it  is  printed  should  be  stout  and  untearable, 
such  as  cartridge  or  brown  paper.  Question  upon  the 
letter,  its  shape,  etc.,  and  distribute*  to  each  child  a  length 
of  wire  which  should  exactly  correspond  in  length  to  the 
curve  of  the  letter.  The  letter  should  have  been  measured 
beforehand  by  the  teacher  and  the  wire  cut  accordingly. 
The  children  now  bend  the  wire  to  the  shape  of  the 
letter,  and  when  exact  and  examined  by  the  teacher,  the 
children  sew  the  wire  letter  upon  the  hektograph  copy 
with  needle  and  cotton.  They  sew  over  the  wire  each 
time  till  the  letter  is  firmly  secured. 

Paper  scissors  are  distributed  to  the  satisfactory  ones, 
and  the  outline  of  the  letter  cut  from  the  paper  with  a 
margin  of  J  inch  on  each  side  of  the  wire.  The  paper 
keeps  the  wire  in  shape,  which  is  impossible  to  alter  if 
sewn  securely.  To  these  foundations  a  piece  of  straw  plait 
is  sewn  and  the  ends  turned  in  neatly  and  fastened  off. 
Sew  the  plait  to  the  paper  each  side  of  the  wire. 

The  letters  most  suitable  for  making  are  :  I,  L,  Y,  U, 
Z,  W,  C,  0,  S,  M,  N,  D,  P,  J,  which  can  be  made  from  one 
straight  piece  of  wire  and  plait,  the  other  letters  need 
pieces  added. 

Use. — These  large  letters  look  very  nice,  and  if  mounted 
upon  square  cards  may  be  used  in  the  babies'  room  for 


1 64  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Kindergarten  games.     Each  child  could  have  one  suspended 


on 


FIG.  137.— Wall  Pocket. 

its  neck,  and  the  children  could  be  named  according  to 


STRA  W  PLAIT  WORK  165 

their  letter  and  answer  to  the  dictation  of  the  teacher. 
Word-building  might  also  be  made  with  them.  They  also 
look  well  made  into  texts  or  mottoes  to  be  hung  on  the 
walls. 

WALL  POCKET 

Materials  required. — 1.  A  square  frame,  with  nails 
\  inch  apart. 

2.  Macrame  string,  straw  plait,  blue  and  yellow,  f  inch 
wide. 

3.  Yellow  ribbon,  2  inches  wide. 

Plan  of  Lesson. — Wind  the  straw  plait  continuously  up 
and  down  upon  the  nails,  as  described  in  "  Ribbon  Weaving." 
This  will  represent  a  tight  mat.  Cut  the  weaving  plait  in 
lengths  and  interlace  across,  one  over  and  one  under.  In 
Fig.  137  a  yellow  strand  of  Macrame  twine  is  woven  in 
with  the  plait  and  much  improves  the  appearance.  The 
colour  of  plait  is  blue  and  yellow.  A  square  of  12  inches 
is  required  for  this  pocket.  When  the  weaving  is  complete, 
tack  the  weaving  ends  to  the  side  strands  of  mat.  Next 
snip  the  loops  round  nails  and  also  tack  these  securely. 
Finish  the  square  with  a  twisted  binding  on  both  sides.  Turn 
up  three  corners  and  catch  together  and  finish  with  a  large 
bow  of  yellow  ribbon,  and  add  another  bow  at  the  top 
corner.  Form  a  loop  with  the  plait  when  binding  to  suspend 
it.  These  pockets  are  made  in  pairs. 

HANDBAG 

Materials  required.— 1.  Straw  plait,  plain  or  mixed, 
at  6d.  per  bundle  of  60  yards. 

2.  A  wooden  box  about  3  inches  deep  and  11  inches 
long  and  8  inches  wide. 


166 


VARIED  O  CCU PA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VI NG 


3.  Needle  and  cotton. 

Plan  of  Lesson. — Boxes  suitable  for  the  foundation 
are  the  wooden  chocolate  and  sweet  boxes,  which  may 
*readily  be  obtained  by  the  asking  for  at  any  Italian  ware- 
house. The  straw  plait  can  be  bought  in  very  pretty 
mixtures  of  red  and  cream,  blue  and  cream,  brown  and 


Fia.  138.— Handbag. 

cream,  blue  and  brown,   etc.,  or  in  the  plain  colours  of 
white,  blue,  brown,  and  marone. 

Begin  at  one  corner  of  the  box  and  secure  the  end  of 
straw  plait  with  a  drawing  pin,  well  forced  in.  Let  the 
child  now  wind  the  plait  evenly  round  the  box  to  the  depth 
of  6  or  7  inches.  The  plait  must  not  be  pulled  too  tightly, 
but  left  sufficiently  slack  to  allow  for  the  transverse 
weaving.  Cut  off  the  plait  and  secure  the  end  with  another 
drawing  pin.  The  weaving  will  be  found  easier  to  do  if 


STRA  W  PLAIT  WORK 


167 


only  the  sides  of  the  box  be  used,  and  the  top  and  bottom 
broken  away. 

Next  cut  several  lengths  of  the  plait  for  the  weaving 
strands.  These  must  be  long  enough  to  reach  entirely 
round  from  the  top  strand  on  one  side  to  the  top  strand  on 
the  opposite  side.  They  are  best  cut  a  little  longer  than 


!v>vxx  <"'.'J^i''<'Jf!f''  *•/;'' 'Hi 

•  -: *. --.  <r *  -'. *.*. •-. s s i  •-: •; t^> -/.U' 


V»tVW^WU>t-»iB3iyA^it^i| 

^>;-S'^Y<'-'— '•!S\/-^^-'--'^Vt,h'-f1-^V>M/<^^gS 

g-;,>^^•^•v^^-^<.^-^'^^s^^>•v^'^/^^^As<^^v-,vv<UIij; 


IsBP 


c Vj  >'?•:•;•,'•.•'/.  >' : ^;  »/•;  x.t  ^  I  >'J-fx-Vv<.«/iW> VVV  /^ { tA 
^  ^  ^  f  ?/  {-,(><  f-j  -?  .SS  vy  ?-,  •>  ^'^^  SM  -l(  r-'i  ^  - 'V^IH1  j 


fi'v'  V  { *  ? ) '  H 1  <  ^V<  ii^'/_''  **'**** f '*'  *"  'S  S"SX>^<i 
4^A^-.AY^S^S'-M4^>^/??-^>sy/-VX-s^^.^^77fe 


^fyr>V>>7^^-V.--V^^f^^.r/(-f^^ 

^/.^^/.^^^V^^/vV^^V^Xx'/y^y^^^^.t^^^^A'^/.W 

^V/>f>^r;^^^?rv^>^v/;y;^f/^ti[; 


FIG.  139. 

required,   and   will   then    need    no   fastening  at  the  ends 
whilst  they  are  being  woven. 

The  weaving  is  first  carried  down  one  wide  side,  across 
the  bottom  and  up  the  other  wide  side.  This  done,  it  is 
next  woven  up  the  narrow  side  of  box,  across  the  bottom 
and  up  the  other  narrow  side,  which  completes  the 
weaving. 


168  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Finishing  off. — Slip  the  box  out  of  the  weaving,  and 
with  needle  and  thread  secure  the  ends  neatly — first  the 
two  ends  of  the  foundation  plait,  and  lastly  the  weaving 
ends.  These  should  be  sewn  to  the  top  round,  and  then 
cut  off  close.  To  finish  neatly,  a  piece  of  plait  is  sewn 
round  the  top  on  the  inside  and  another  piece  outside.  By 
this  arrangement,  all  the  ends  are  secured  and  hidden  be- 
tween the  outer  and  inner  bindings. 

Handles. — Stitch  two  pieces  of  plait  together  for  the 
handles  and  sew  one  handle  on  each  side.  Insert  the  ends 
into  the  weaving,  and  strongly  sew  in  place  with  the  needle 
and  thread.  A  cover  to  overlap  and  button  with  loop  is 
easily  made  by  cutting  the  weaving  strips  6  inches  longer 
than  required  for  open  basket.  Make  the  basket  exactly 
in  the  same  way,  and  let  the  6  inches  extend  on  one  side 
only.  When  the  basket  is  complete  in  weaving,  as  before 
described,  then  flatly  weave  to  and  fro  the  strands  left  on  one 
side.  Secure  the  ends  and  bind  in  similar  way  with  the 
double  plait.  Turn  the  flap  over  to  the  front  and  finish 
with  two  buttons  and  loops  of  elastic. 

HANDKERCHIEF  AND  GLOVE  Box 

Materials  required. — 1.  Square  and  oblong  cardboard 
boxes. 

2.  Fine  straw  plait,  f  inch  wide,  crimson  mixture. 

3.  Ribbon,  1  inch  wide,  to  match. 

4.  Crimson  sarcenet  for  lining. 

Plan  of  Lesson. --Cardboard  boxes  of  all  shapes  and 
sizes  may  be  utilised  for  this  work  That  in  Fig.  140 
is  an  ordinary  cardboard  glove  box,  begged  from  the 
drapers.  The  plan  of  making  is  very  similar  to  that  of 
handbag,  with  this  difference,  that  the  box  is  entirely  wound 


STRA  W  PLAIT  WORK 


169 


and  covered  with  weaving.  Begin  at  corner  and  wind 
round  the  entire  box  one  way,  rather  loosely.  Secure  the 
ends.  Cut  lengths  of  plait  to  measure  round  the  reverse 


FIG.  140.— Handkerchief  and  Glove  Box. 


way.     Weave  these  in,  beginning  always  at  the  right  or 
left  side  of  the  top  of  the  box.     The  reason  for  this  is,  that 


FIG.  141. 

the  weaving  will  have  to  be  cut  on  two  sides  for  the  lid  of 
box  to  open,  and  therefore  the  beginning  and  ending  of  the 
plait  will  come  at  one  side  of  the  lid. 

When  the  entire  box  is  covered  in  weaving,  snip  very 
carefully  the  plait  at  the  edges  where  the  lid  is  to  open. 


1 70  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

One  side  of  the  weaving  must  be  left  intact  to  form  the  hinge.1 
Then  sew  the  plait  to  the  cardboard  foundation,  and  line 
inside  with  gathered  silk,  and  finish  the  outer  edge  with  a 
twist  of  the  plait  which  must  overlap  the  weaving  so  that 
the  cover  closely  fits.  Attach  ribbon  to  the  lid  and  front 
of  box,  to  tie  together,  and  place  a  smart  bow  on  the  top 
for  ornamentation. 

Any  kind  of  shape  may  be  covered  and  woven  in  this 


FIG.  142. 

way.  Some  as  open  work-baskets  and  others  as  flat  covered 
baskets,  which  are  most  useful  to  hold  ladies'  ribbons,  ties, 
etc.  The  straw  plait  is  now  manufactured  in  such  endless 
variety,  that  no  difficulty  should  be  found  for  producing 
most  artistic,  cheap,  and  useful  work. 


CANE  WEAVING 

General  Description. — There  are  few  occupations  for 
boys  so  easy,  useful,  and  attractive  as  cane  weaving.  It 
gives  them  endless  pleasure,  especially  when  they  are  able 
to  weave  various  articles.  Its  educational  value  in  training 
the  hand  and  eye  cannot  be  equalled  in  any  other  occupa- 

1  The  cardboard  lid  should  have  been  loosely  attached  to  the  box 
and  the  rim  cut  off  before  the  weaving  was  commenced. 


CANE   WEAVING  171 

tion,  whilst  the  faculties  of  form  and  judgment  are  most 
fully  exercised  and  developed.  Parents  are  pleased  with 
the  work  because  it  is  useful,  and  many  instances  occur  in 
which  the  children  make  articles  at  home,  and  compete  at 
Bands  of  Hope  for  prizes,  etc. 

The  material  used  is  inexpensive,  and  repays  its  cost  in 
the  sale  of  the  useful  articles  made. 

The  occupation  is  clean,  and  of  little  trouble,  and  one 
which  can  be  taken  easily  by  a  class  of  thirty  boys. 

Method  of  Teaching". — The  children  who  enter  upon 
this  occupation  should  have  had  practical  instruction  in 
mat-weaving,  and  thus  be  competent  to  follow  the  directions 
of  the  teacher.  The  best  method  of  teaching  this  subject, 
is  to  start  the  whole  class  at  the  work,  and  at  the  same  stage 
of  the  work,  step  by  step,  until  the  weaving  is  thoroughly 
understood.  About  half  the  year  should  be  spent  in  this 
simultaneous  teaching,  and  by  that  time  the  majority  will 
have  become  proficient  and  capable  of  constructing  an 
entire  basket  themselves. 

Teachers  who  are  ignorant  of  the  subject  cannot  fail  to 
attain  success,  if  they  will  follow  the  instructions  laid  down 
in  these  articles,  and  work  each  exercise  themselves,  and 
find  its  difficulties  and  how  best  to  cope  with -them  before 
attempting  to  teach  the  children.  No  doubt,  at  first,  to 
an  unskilled  hand,  the  cane  will  seem  an  unmanageable 
item,  but  with  a  little  tact,  which  can  only  be  gained  by 
practical  work,  it  will  become  as  easy  of  manipulation  as 
a  length  of  string. 

Material. — The  cane  used  is  round  French  cane  of 
various  sizes,  viz.  00,  0,  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  and  6. 

The  first  sizes  are  the  finest,  and  suitable  for  beginners, 
and  the  making  of  small  articles. 

It  is  always  advisable  to  use  a  size  coarser  for  the  founda- 


172  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

tion  strands  than  that  used  for  weaving,  so  as  to  give 
firmness  to  the  work. 

Nos.  3  and  4  are  good  for  foundations. 

The  cane,  prepared  ready  for  use,  may  be  obtained  in 
bundles  from  any  Kindergarten  depot,  and  varies  in 
price  according  to  the  size  from  Is.  to  2s.  a  Ib.  for  the 
finest  quality. 

There  is  a  mistaken  idea  that  small  dolls'  articles  are 
easier  to  make  than  larger  ones.  As  far  as  plain,  flat 
articles  are  concerned,  this  may  be  true,  but  practical 
experience  has  proved  the  opposite,  for  the  smaller  the 
article  the  more  difficult  it  is  to  weave  and  make  a  good 
shape. 

A  large  article  needs  more  foundation  strands,  and 
coarser  cane,  but  the  weaving  is  easier  and  less  difficult  to 
keep  in  good  shape. 

It  is  well  to  present  only  one  difficulty  at  a  time  to 
children,  and  for  them  to  master  that  one  before  attempting 
another.  Therefore  this  book  is  graded  upon  that  principle 
and  will  treat  of— 

1.  Horizontal  cane  weaving  on  a  frame. 

2.  Flat  circular  weaving. 

3.  Upright  circular  weaving. 

4.  Flat  and  upright  circular  weaving  combined. 


HOEIZONTAL  CANE  WEAVING 

WASHSTAND  SPLASHER 

Introduction. — As  the  children  will  have  already  had 
experience  in  weaving  upon  a  frame,  it  is  advisable  to  let 
them  have  a  little  practice  of  using  cane  before  they  learn 


HORIZONTAL  CANE   WEAVING  173 

circular  weaving.  The  weaving  frame  used  for  string  or 
old  slate  frames  are  both  suitable  for  the  work,  and  the 
great  regularity  and  firmness  make  it  valuable  for  useful 
articles.  Square  pieces  may  be  bent  into  envelope  wall 
pockets,  or  square  baskets  with  the  points  turned  backwards. 
The  same  piece  may  be  rolled  round,  and  two  circular  mats 
added  at  each  end  to  form  a  music  case,  or  knitting  basket. 
Various  shapes  may  be  manipulated  by  soaking  thoroughly 
the  piece  of  weaving  in  hot  water,  and  then  bending  and 
tying  in  shape  and  left  till  dry. 

Size. — Splasher,  36  X  20  inches  wide. 

Materials  required.—  1.  Coarse  cane,  No.  6. 

2.  Wooden  frame,  36  x  18  inches  wide. 

Plan, — An  old  picture  frame  stretcher  answers  well 
for  the  frame.  Insert  into  the  long  sides  of  the  frame  short 
French  nails  \\  inches  apart.  Thoroughly  soak  the  cane 
and  wind  it  backwards  and  forwards  across  the  frame  arid 
round  the  nails,  as  shown  in  "String  Frame,"  Fig.  67.  See 
that  the  strands  are  straight  and  that  the  end  ones  are 
secure  and  firm ;  it  is  best  to  have  the  end  strands  double, 
because  the  weaving  thread  is  turned  back  upon  these  and 
strength  is  needed  to  keep  them  straight  and  firm.  A 
round  blind  stick  at  each  end  will  answer  the  purpose 
better  still. 

The  weaving  is  very  simple,  just  over  and  under,  as  in 
ordinary  mat- plaiting,  turning  round  at  each  end  and 
weaving  back  again.  If  the  length  is  not  sufficient  to 
finish  a  row,  it  should  be  cut  off  at  the  end  of  the  preceding 
row  and  another  length  begun ;  no  joins  are  then  visible 
anywhere.  When  the  weaving  is  of  the  size  required,  slip 
off  the  loops  from  the  nails,  splice  all  ends  neatly,  and  finish 
both  sides  by  first  sizing  and  then  enamelling  in  red  or  any 
other  colour.  These  splashers  are  most  durable  and  may 


174  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

be  washed  and  used  for  years ;  they  are  easily  made  by 
children  of  six  and  seven  years  of  age. 

DOUBLE  FERN  POCKET 
Material  required.— No.  1  cane. 

Method. — This  pocket  is  made  from  an  oblong  piece  of 
weaving  which  is  woven  on  the  weaving  frame  described 
under  "String  Plaiting."  The  cane  is  wound  up  and  down 
upon  the  thirty-eight  points,  and  long  lengths  of  cane  are  woven 
backwards  and  forwards  until  the  length  is  used  up.  It  is 
better  to  begin  a  new  length  at  the  beginning  of  a  row 
rather  than  in  the  middle.  The  point  of  difficulty  in  this 
frame  weaving  is  the  turning  back  of  the  cane  at  each  end 
of  the  frame,  where  it  is  liable  to  be  irregular.  To  avoid 
this  a  stout  strand  of  cane  should  be  added  at  each  end 
upon  which  to  turn  the  weaving  thread.  When  the  frame 
is  full  and  the  piece  measures  ISxlOj  inches,  remove  it 
from  the  frame  and  plunge  it  into  warm  water.  When 
sufficiently  soaked  take  the  two  lower  corners  and  curl 
upwards  and  inwards  to  form  two  pockets  as  shown  in 
Fig.  143,  tie  in  position,  and  leave  to  dry.  Secure  the 
pockets  together  by  threading  in  and  out  a  fine  length  of  cane 
from  the  back.  Varnish  thoroughly  and  mount  the  pocket 
upon  an  oblong  mount  of  stout  cardboard  covered  with 
plush  or  velveteen.  Add  bows  of  ribbon  top  and  bottom 
in  harmony  with  colour  of  mount.  The  pocket  is  useful 
for  artificial  grasses  or  ferns. 

BASKET  WEAVING 
Directions  to  be  followed.— The  following  points 

must  be  borne  in  mind  and  carried  out,  if  the  teaching  is 
to  be  successful : — 


Fio.  143.— Double  Fern  Pocket. 


176  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Rule  I. — Soa-k  the  cane  in  clean  cold  water  for  two  or  three 
hours  before  using. 

If  the  cane  be  soaked  thoroughly,  it  will  become  soft 
and  pliable  and  as  easy  to  manage  and  weave  into  place  as 
a  length  of  string  or  thread. 

Beginners  must  use  soaked  cane  until  they  are  dexterous 
in  the  work,  if  not,  the  dry  cane  will  be  stiff,  brittle,  and 
unmanageable  in  their  untrained  fingers. 

One  objection  to  soaking  the  cane  is  that  it  becomes 
discoloured  and  frayed,  thus  losing  the  smooth,  white, 
glossy  appearance  which  weaving  with  dry  cane  gives  to 
an  article.  However,  it  is  best  to  learn  with  soaked  cane 
and  use  dry  for  finished  and  excellent  work. 

Rule  II. — The  foundation  strands  must  always  consist  of  an 
uneven  number  of  strands. 

All  foundations  are  made  of  a  number  of  pairs,  with  an 
odd  strand  inserted  into  the  centre,  or  by  leaving  an  end 
of  the  weaving  thread  and  treating  it  as  an  odd  strand. 
The  odd  strand  must  be  considered  equal  to  a  set  or  pair  for 
the  first  few  rounds  of  weaving.  The  odd  strand  is  needed 
so  that  the  weaving  thread  alternates  properly. 

Rule  III. — Weave  with  the  right  hand,  using  the  first  finger 
and  thumb,  and  keep  the  hand  close  up  to  the  weaving. 

Children  are  liable  to  weave  away  from  the  work, 
holding  the  strand  some  2  or  3  inches  from  the  article. 
The  work  will  be  loose  and  uneven  if  done  in  this  way,  so 
the  teacher  should  see  from  the  first  that  the  weaving 
strand  is  held  close  to  the  work. 

Rule  IV. — Use  the  left  hand  to  turn  the  work,  and  pull  the 
foundation  strands  lack  in  position,  i.e.  straight  with  the  centre. 

As  the  child  weaves  round  from  right  to  left  of  a  flat 
article,  the  foundation  strands  will  be  pulled  sideways  and 
remain  so,  unless  they  are  pulled  back  into  position  by  the 


BASKET  WEAVING  177 

left  hand.  In  reality  the  right  and  left  hands  work  together, 
the  first  pulling  forward  the  foundation  strands,  and  the 
left  pulling  them  back  again. 

Rule  V. — Weave  over  one  strand,  and  under  the  next,  keeping 
the  spaces  between  each  strand  of  equal  width. 

This  work  will  not  admit  of  uneven  patterns  being 
introduced.  The  weaving  may  be  varied  only  by  weaving 
two  or  three  rounds  alike  and  then  alternating  for  the  same 
number  of  rows  (see  Fig.  164). 

Rule  VI. — Always  begin  to  divide  the  foundation  strands 
after  passing  the  single  strand,  if  not  altered  at  this  point  the 
weaving  will  not  alternate  properly. 

Rule  VII. — To  begin  a  new  weaving  strand,  pass  the  end 
down  by  the  side  of  the  last  foundation  ray,  or,  better  plan,  weave 
it  under  and  over  the  last  three  strands  side  by  side  with  the  old 
end.  If  the  cane  be  coarse,  point  the  ends  of,  old  and  new 
strands  to  lie  together. 

Rule  VIII. —  Wlien  the  weaving  thread  is  worked  up  and  a 
new  one  is  required,  leave  the  old  end  loose,  or  temporarily 
push  it  down  into  the  weaving,  and  begin  the  new  one  as  described 
above. 

Note. — Pushing  the  new  and  old  ends  into  the  weaving  gives 
the  work  an  untidy  appearance.  It  is  useful  for  children  to 
begin  and  end  so,  but  when  the  article  is  finished,  these  ends 
should  be  pulled  up  and  cut  off  close  to  the  weaving  on 
wrong  side. 

Remarks. — The  beginning  or  foundation  is  best  done 
by  the  teacher  until  the  children  have  acquired  dexterity 
in  handling  the  cane.  Children  are  very  soon  able  to  begin 
simple  articles,  and,  in  fact,  an  ordinary  class  will  be  sure 
to  contain  a  few  apt  pupils  who  will  be  able  to  prepare  the 
work  of  the  class  and  teach  others  how  to  begin. 

All  articles  when  finished  are  much  improved  by  a  coat 
N 


178  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

of  clear  copal  varnish.  The  article  to  be  varnished  should 
first  be  sized,  otherwise,  if  the  cane  be  at  all  greasy  from  the 
children's  hands,  the  varnish  will  not  dry  but  remain  sticky. 

Other  articles  look  well  dyed.  A  penny  packet  of 
Judson's  dye,  dissolved  in  a  pail  of  warm  water,  will  be 
sufficient  for  several  articles.  The  articles  should  be  steeped 
in  the  water  until  the  cane  has  absorbed  sufficient  of  the 
dye  for  the  colour  desired,  and  then  varnished. 

Another  variety  of  finishing  is  to  use  Aspinall's  enamel. 
Here,  again,  the  articles  must  be  thoroughly  washed  or  sized, 
and  the  enamel  made  liquid  by  the  addition  of  turpentine. 
It  requires  putting  on  thinly  and  evenly  to  look  well.  A 
small  flat  mat  of  4 -inch  diameter  is  the  easiest  exercise 
for  a  first  lesson,  and,  in  teaching  it,  the  mat  should  be  kept 
flat  on  the  desk  with  the  left  hand,  and  turned  over  to  left 
as  the  weaving  proceeds  on  the  right-hand  side. 


BEGINNINGS 

Children  who  are  learning  "  to  begin  "  themselves  for 
the  first  time  should  not  have  more  than  four  strands  to 
manage,  and  weave  these,  first  with  string  and  then  fine 
cane.  These  small  centres  should  be  unwound  and  re-woven 
again  and  again  until  the  child  learns  the  knack  of  doing  it. 


No.l 

But  it  is  not  advisable  to  worry  children  at  first  with 
"  beginning  "  themselves.  If  so,  they  are  likely  to  become 
disheartened  and  dislike  the  work,  whereas,  they  are 
delighted  as  they  see  the  work  grow  under  their  hands. 
Therefore,  let  the  work  be  started  for  infants  and  the 
"  beginning  on  "  left  till  they  are  proficient  in  cane-weav- 


BASKET  WEAVING 


179 


ing.     The  illustrations  show  different  methods  of  arranging 
the  foundation  strands. 


Fio.  144. 


No.  2 


Cut  eight  pieces  of  cane  8  inches  long  for  the  foundation. 
Take  four  pieces  and  lay  flat  across  the  centre  of  the  other 
four,  making  a  four-armed  cross  (see  Fig.  145). 


E 


FIG.  145. 


i8o 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


Hold  the  centre  firmly  in  the  left  hand,  and  with  the 
weaving  thread  weave  over  the  left  four  and  under  the  top 
four,  leaving  an  end  at  the  beginning  as  long  as  the  founda- 
tion strands.  Treat  the  odd  strand  as  "a  set,"  and  the 
weaving  will  alternate  next  round. 

No.  3 

The  same  materials,  crossed  also  in  the  same  manner, 
may  be  secured  by  leaving  an  odd  strand  and  crossing 
from  corner  to  corner,  under  the  top  four,  and  back  over 


FIG.  146. 

the  front,  from  corner  to  corner.     This  done,  weave  round 
over  four  and  under  four,  as  in  preceding  exercise. 

No.  4 

Take  eight  pieces  of  cane  as  before,  and  arrange  in  four 
pairs,  crossing  in  the  centre.  Hold  the  centre  firmly  and 
proceed  to  thread  with  the  threader.  Place  one  end  of  it 
across  the  under  side  to  form  the  odd  ray,  hold  it  in  posi- 
tion, and  then  weave  round  over  two  and  under  two,  treating 


BASKET  WEAVING 


181 


the   odd  ray  as  a  pair.     Draw  the  first  round  tightly  to 
make  the  centre  close  and  firm. 


Fm.  147. 


No.  5 
Take  eight  pieces  of  cane  as  before  and  arrange  in  pairs, 


FIG.  148. 


placing  two  pairs  vertically  and  interweaving  the  other  two 


1 82  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

pairs  horizontally  through  the  centre.     Proceed  to  weave 
with  the  weaving  strand  the  same  as  in  No.  1. 


o 


Note. — Either  of  the  beginnings  may  be  used  for  all  articles. 
Larger  articles  need  more  strands,  these  must  be  divided  in 
similar  proportion. 

If  the  foundations  are  coarse  and  difficult  to  secure,  the 
centre  cane  should  be  first  spliced  and  then  wound  over  by  a  strip 
of  bass,  the  kind  of  grass  used  by  florists  for  tying  up  plants. 
This  arrangement  is  neat  and  strong  and  the  weaving  afterwards 
is  easy  to  manage.  If  the  bass  is  procurable,  it  is  advisable  to 
prepare  the  work  ready  for  the  children  in  this  way. 

For  the  first  few  lessons,  it  is  a  good  plan  to  use  common  fine 
twine  for  weaving  instead  of  cane,  until  the  children  have  acquired 
the  necessary  dexterity  in  round  weaving. 

BORDERS 

When  the  weaving  of  an  article  is  complete  the  founda- 
tion strands  have  to  be  fastened  off.  Upon  the  border 
much  of  the  style  and  finish  of  a  basket  depends.  The 
spokes  should  be  sufficiently  long  enough  to  reach  to  the 


FIG.  149. 

centre  of  a  flat  article,  or  to  the  bottom  of  .the  sides  of 
an  upright  one.     This  insertion  of  the  spokes  really  forms 
a  double  strand  to  the  foundation,  and  the  article  woven  is 
firmer  and  not  likely  to  lose  its  shape  or  become  unwoven. 
To  finish  a  border,  first  cut  all  the  spokes  equal  in  length 


BASKET  WEAVING 


183 


and  gently  bend  in  a  semicircular  shape.  The  spokes  should 
be  damp,  but  not  too  much  so,  as  the  cane  needs  to  be  stiff 
to  push  it  down  into  the  weaving.  The  use  of  a  steel  skewer 
or  knitting  needle  is  advantageous  for  this  part  of  the  work. 
It  is  so  direct  in  its  course  that  the  cane  easily  follows  at 
the  side.  The  spokes  form  a  series  of  loops  round  the 
article ;  these  may  be  simple  and  single,  or  crossed  and 
interlaced,  as  in  the  following  figures.  Others  may  be 
finished  by  twisting  and  plaiting  the  spokes.  Of  course 
these  are  more  difficult  to  do  and  will  require  extra  super- 
vision of  the  teacher. 

Border  1. — Single  strand  and  single  loop.  Each  end  is 
passed  down  at  the  side  of  next  foundation  strand. 

Border  2. — Double  strands  and  double  loops.  Each  pair 
of  ends  is  passed  down  by  the  side  of  the  next  pair  of  founda- 
tion strands. 


FIG.  150. 


Border  3. — Single  strands  and  single  loops.  Each  end 
passes  behind  the  next  foundation  strand,  and  is  pushed 
down  by  the  side  of  the  second  strand  from  it. 


FIG.  151. 

Border  4. — Double  strands  and  double  loops.     Each  pair 


i84 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


of  ends  pass  in  front  of  the  next  pair,  and  are  pushed  down 
at  the  side  of  the  second. 


FIG.  152. 


Border  5. — Double  strands  and  double  loops.  Each  pair 
passes  behind  the  next  two  pairs,  and  is  pushed  down  at  the 
side  of  the  third  pair. 


FIG.  153. 


Border  6. — The  rays  may  be  either  single  or  in  pairs. 
Take  one  ray,  or  a  pair,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  pass  by 


FIG.  154. 


BASKET  WEAVING  185 

the  next  four  or  five  foundation  strands,  and  insert  the  end 
into  the  fifth  or  sixth.  Press  up  the  loop  formed  and 
gently  pinch  it  in  the  middle.  Take  the  next  ray  or  pair 
and  do  the  same,  passing  behind  the  one  next  to  it,  and 
interlacing  the  others,  as  in  Fig.  154.  Deep  borders  of 
open  work,  such  as  the  above,  are  improved  by  interlacing 
ribbon  through  the  openings. 

First  Ray. — Take  a  ray,  bend  in  half-circle,  and  pass  it 
before  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  rays,  and  insert  it  at 
the  side  of  fifth  ray. 

Second  Ray. — Take  second  ray,  pass  it  before  the  next 
three  rays  and  under  the  loop  made  by  first  ray,  and  then 
insert  into  weaving  by  the  side  of  the  sixth  ray. 

Third  Ray. — Take  third  ray,  pass  under  and  over  and 
under  the  loops  of  first  and  second  and  third  rays,  and 
then  down  at  the  side  of  seventh  ray,  or  the  fourth  from 
itself. 

Each  ray  is  treated  in  the  same  manner,  always  going 
first  under,  then  over,  and  under  the  loops,  before  being 
pushed  down  into  the  weaving.  This  gives  a  pretty  twisted 
border  (see  Fig.  154). 

Border  1. — Cut  strands  of  equal  length.     Pinch  or  flatten 


FIG.  155. 


each  one  where  it  issues  from  the  weaving.  Take  any 
strand,  weave  it  over  and  under  the  adjoining  strands  till 
finished.  Take  each  ray  and  treat  in  the  same  manner. 


1 86  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


FLAT  CIRCULAR  WEAVING 

This  weaving,  as  the  term  implies,  consists  of  circular 
articles  which  require  to  be  kept  perfectly  flat  in  the  weav- 
ing, such  as  round  mats,  dinner  mats,  etc.  The  work  should 
be  kept  on  the  desk,  and  the  left  hand  employed  to  turn 
and  keep  it  flat  as  the  weaving  proceeds  with  the  right. 

SMALL  CIRCULAR  MAT 

Materials.— 1.  Eight  strands  of  cane  (No.  2),  8  inches 
long,  for  the  foundation. 


FIG.  156.— Small  Circular  Mat. 

2.  A  length  of  weaving  cane  (No.  1),  3  yards  long. 

Method. — Show  on  blackboard  how  the  strands  of  cane 
are  to  be  arranged.  No.  2  is  as  simple  as  any,  and  will  be 
described  in  this  case.  Children  to  place  their  canes  in 
position  on  the  desk,  the  teacher  to  explain  and  show  some 
made  basket-work,  to  illustrate  how  important  and  neces- 


FLAT  CIRCULAR  WEAVING 


187 


sary  it  is  for  this  part  to  be  strong  and  well  made,  as  upon 
it  the  whole  of  the  remaining  portion  depends.  Give  the 
name  "Foundation,"  and  refer  to  foundation  of  houses, 
laying  foundation-stones,  etc.  Write  word  on  blackboard. 

Teacher  to  take  strands  and  hold  them  in  correct  posi- 
tion before  class,  ie.  as  a  four-armed  cross;  children  to 
imitate. 

Next  take  the  long  "  weaving  thread,"  explain  why  so 


FIG.  157. 

called,  and  compare  the  foundation  to  tight  strips  of  mat, 
and  the  weaving  thread  to  the  loose  strips. 

Place  the  weaving  thread  E  under  four  and  over  four, 
and  leave  an  end  about  five  inches  long  to  make  the  extra 
spoke,  which  is  needed  to  make  the  weaving  alternate 
properly.  If  the  weaving  thread  be  pulled  tight  at  each 
step  the  centre  will  be  compact  and  firm.  The  single  strand 
must  be  treated  as  a  set  of  four,  and  the  children  be  made 
to  count  the  "sets." 

Whichever  way  of  beginning  is  adopted,  when  some 


188  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

three  or  four  rounds  have  been  woven,  the  spokes  must  be 
separated  into  "twos,"  and  two  must  be  woven  at  a  time 
instead  of  four — two  over  and  two  under.  This  separation 
must  begin  immediately  after  passing  the  single  ray. 

When  the  mat  is  about  four  inches  in  diameter,  the  weav- 
ing thread  should  be  cut  off  and  the  end  inserted  into  the 
mat  whilst  the  border  is  being  done,  after  which  it  can 
be  pulled  out  and  cut  off  short. 

Cut  all  the  spokes  equal  in  length,  and  finish  by  taking 
the  ends  of  each  two  spokes  and  pushing  them  into  the 
weaving  by  the  side  of  next  two  spokes,  as  in  Figs.  150  and 
156. 

HOW  TO   UTILISE   THESE   MATS 

1.  Letter  Rack — Take  a  piece  of  stout  cardboard  and 
cover  in  velveteen  or  plush. 

Sew  on  four  or  six  mats  (one  below  the  other)  to  the 
covered  foundation,  and  secure  firmly  with  a  few  stitches 
of  strong  thread.  Cover  the  stitches  with  a  bow  of  ribbon, 
or  arrange  the  next  mat  to  overlap  and  hide  the  fastening. 
Only  the  border  portion  should  be  fastened.  Tie  each  mat 
at  the  side,  and  to  the  foundation,  with  narrow  ribbon,  and 
fasten  bows  and  loop  at  the  top  to  suspend  it.  Cover  the 
back  neatly  with  a  piece  of  sateen  (see  Fig.  99  in  "  String 
Weaving"). 

2.  Pin-cushion. — Make  small  mat  according  to  directions. 
Cut  a  circle  of  cardboard  2  inches  in  diameter,  upon  it 
place  a  ball  of  frayings  or  wadding,  and  cover  over  with  a 
circular  piece  of  velvet  or  plush.     Gather  the  edge  of  velvet 
with  continuous   thread,  and  draw  it  tightly  round  the 
circle  of  cardboard,  as  if  covering  an  ordinary  mould  button. 
This  forms  the  cushion,  which  is  sewn  on  to  the  centre  of 
mat  or  glued  in  position.      A  twisted  ribbon  tied  round 


FLAT  CIRCULAR   WEAVING  189 

hides  the  space  between  the  cushion  and  mat.  Another 
ribbon  is  threaded  through  the  border,  and  bows  and  loops 
added  to  suspend  it  (see  Fig.  98  in  "  String  Weaving  "). 

3.  Candle  Shade. — Make  a  mat  according  to  directions. 
Weave  two  mats  exactly  alike,  and  when  finished  add  brass 
candle  clips.     Pass  the  point  of  clip  well  into  the  weaving 
at  the  outer  portion,  not  the  centre,  otherwise  the  flame 
of  the  candle  will  not  be  hidden. 

4.  Card  Basket. — Six  or  seven  of  these  mats,  tied  together 
with  bows  of  ribbon,  and  tied  again  to  a  larger  mat  for  the 
bottom,  will  form  a  pretty  and  useful  card  basket. 

LARGE  ROUND  MAT 

The  new  difficulty  presented  in  this  jnat  will  be  the 
division  of  the  foundation  rays.  This  separation  must 
always  take  place  after  passing  the  single  strand,  otherwise 
the  weaving  will  not  alternate  properly. 

Materials  required. — 1.  Fine  cane,  No.  1,  for  weav- 
ing. 

2.  Medium  cane,  No.  3,  for  foundation. 

3.  Varnish  or  enamel. 

Method  employed. — Cut  sixteen  lengths  of  cane  20 
inches  long.  Cross  eight  upon  eight  and  begin  as  directed 
in  Beginning  3. 

Leave  an  end  for  the  odd  strand  and  cross  the  centre 
diagonally,  bringing  the  weaving  thread  out  again  at  the 
same  corner.  If  the  second  end  be  twisted  round  the  first 
and  cut  off  even,  the  two  will  form  the  odd  strand  (Fig.  159). 
Begin  with  a  fresh  length  of  cane  and  weave  over  four 
and  under  four  for  six  rounds,  then  divide  into  "twos." 
Remember  the  twisted  strands  are  counted  each  time  as  a 
"set"  either  of  "four"  or  "two." 


I9o  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Pull  the  weaving  thread  tight,  and  keep  the  work  close 
round  the  centre  at  each  step.  When  the  weaving 
thread  is  used  up,  begin  with  a  new  one,  simply  passing 
the  end  back  two  or  three  spokes,  side  by  side  with 


FIG.  158.— Large  Round  Mat. 

the  old  end.  As  the  weaving  proceeds,  these  ends  will  be 
tightened  and  held  in  position  by  future  rounds.  If  the 
cane  is  fine  no  difficulty  will  accrue  from  these  ends,  but 
if  the  coarse  cane  is  being  used,  both  the  old  and  new  end 
should  be  spliced  so  as  to  lie  together  and  form  the  size  of 
the  whole  cane. 


FLAT  CIRCULAR   WEAVING 


191 


When  the  weaving  has  proceeded  to  2  inches  from 
the  centre,  then  divide  the  "twos"  into  "ones"  directly 
after  passing  the  single  strand,  and  proceed  one  over,  one 
under,  for  six  or  more  rounds.  When  the  circle  is  about 
10  inches  in  diameter,  the  mat  is  finished  all  but  the  border. 
This  would  look  well  done  according  to  Fig.  154,  behind 


FIG.  159. 

one,  over  second,  behind  third,  and  down  beside  the  fourth 
ray.     Finish  by  using  a  stained  varnish. 

Uses. — 1.  Forms  a  very  good  circular  table  mat. 

2.  Forms  a  very  good  hand-screen  by  inserting  a  handle 
between  the  weaving,   up  to  the  centre,   and  decorating 
with  cord  and  tassels,  or  ribbon  and  bows.  .  A  wooden 
knitting  pin  is  suitable  for  handle. 

3.  Cover  one  half  in  gathered  silk  to  form  wall  pocket 
and  ornament  with  ball  trimming,  made  in  the  school,  and 
suspend  with  bows  and  loops  of  ribbons. 


192  VARIED  OCCUPA  T1ONS  IN  WE  A  VING 


OVAL  DINNER  MAT 

One  way  of  beginning  these  mats  is  to  tie  the  cross 
spokes  in  position  with  a  strip  of  bass,  but  a  very  easy  way, 
and  one  which  the  children  can  manage  themselves,  is  the 
following  : — Give  each  child  a  long  length  of  thoroughly 
wet  cane  and  a  slate  (10-inch  slate  for  largest  dinner  mat, 
8-inch  for  medium,  and  the  short  side  of  slate  for  smallest 


Fio.  160.— Oval  Dinner  Mat. 

dinner  mats),  hold  end  of  cane  under  thumb  of  left  hand, 
and  wind  the  length  tightly  round  until  used  up.  Tie  ends 
together  with  string  and  place  slate  on  desk,  with  the  ends 
of  cane  underneath.  Cut  five  lengths  of  cane  10  inches 
long  and  weave  across  the  strands  on  slate.  When  the  five 
lengths  are  inserted  push  the  weaving  close  together  till 
the  strands  on  slate  touch,  and  this  will  throw  the  cross 
strands  about  one  inch  apart,  as  in  Fig.  162.  When  a  tight 
narrow  centre  has  been  formed,  turn  over  slate  and  cut  all 
the  strands  across  the  middle.  Remove  slate,  and  flatten 


FLAT  CIRCULAR  WEAVING 


193 


spokes  into  position.  Begin  weaving,  leaving  an  end  to 
form  the  odd  strand.  Pull  the  first  two  or  three  rounds 
very  tightly  to  secure  a  close  centre.  After  about  six  rounds 
the  corners  will  need  more  strands ;  these  must  be  inserted 
in  pairs,  and  will  be  held  firmly  by  the  rows  already  woven. 


FIG.  161. 

To  give  the  roundness  to  the  sides,  which  cannot  be 
obtained  if  the  weaving  proceeds  evenly  round  the  mat, 
short  lengths  of  cane  are  woven  in  down  the  sides,  two 
separately  from  time  to  time,  and  these  are  kept  in  place 
by  the  long  weaving  thread  which  passes  round  as  usual, 
enclosing  the  short  lengths  and  keeping  them  in  position. 

0 


194 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


This  process  needs  to  be  repeated  twice  or  three  times  in 
making  a  large  mat  to  get  the  requisite  curve  for  the  sides. 


FIG.  162. 


These  mats  are  beautifully  flat,  and  when  varnished  or 
enamelled  scarlet,  are  fit  for  any  dinner  table.  Six  mats 
go  to  a  set — two  large,  two  medium,  and  two  small. 


FLAT  CIRCULAR   WEAVING  195 

The  above  directions  are  given  from  actual  experiment 
and  experience. 

The  same  method,  employed  for  oval  mat,  will  be 
followed  for  producing  the  bottom  of  all  oval  articles. 

If  young  children  are  engaged  in  this  work  they  are  able 
to  get  the  centres  prepared,  but  the  first  two  or  three 
rounds  of  weaving  should  be  done  to  get  the  spokes  in 
position,  after  which  the  children  can  proceed  unaided. 
Stout  cane  foundations  will  need  no  corner  spokes  inserted, 
as  the  cane  can  be  bent  in  position  to  do  without,  as  in  Fig. 
162. 

SHELL  FIRE-SCREEN 
Materials  required.— l.  No.  4  cane  for  foundation. 

2.  No.  1  cane  for  weaving. 

Method. — This  screen  consists  of  a  wooden  easel  and 
three  large  woven  mats  pressed  in  shape  to  represent 
three  large  shells.  Each  circle  is  slightly  smaller  as  it 
ascends,  but  all  are  made  according  to  the  same  directions. 
The  easel  measures  24  inches  high,  and  is  enamelled  pale 
green.  These  easels  may  be  bought  in  various  sizes  at  any 
fancy  repository  from  4|d.  upwards.  When  complete  the 
shells  should  be  filled  with  artificial  flowers  and  grasses, 
and  the  top  ornamented  with  a  large  bow  of  ribbon. 
Smaller  stands  may  be  made  upon  the  same  principle,  and 
used  as  photograph  stands  or  letter  racks  for  table  use. 

Circles. — The  large  circle  measures  16  inches  in  diameter, 
the  second  14,  and  the  third  12.  Twelve  rays  form  the 
foundation  of  each  circle,  and  the  beginning  is  rather  hand- 
some in  appearance.  Divide  the  strands  into  "  threes  "  and 
arrange  them  upon  each  other  as  an  eight- armed  cross. 
There  is  no  odd  strand  to  be  inserted  in  this  beginning, 
but  "three  over"  "three  under"  is  continued  throughout  till 


I96 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


a  circle   of  6   inches  has  been  woven,  when  the  rays  are 
divided  into  "ones."     Three  rounds  alike,  i.e.  going  over 


FIG.  163.— Shell  Fire-screen. 


and  under  the  same,  are  woven  each  time  and  then  alter- 
nated for  another  three  rounds.     When  the  alternation  has 


FLAT  CIR  CULA  R   WE  A  VI NG  1 97 

to  take  place  the  weaving  thread  is  passed  on  the  wrong  side 
under  two  sets  of  strands.  It  will  be  perceived  that  this  is 
actually  necessary  so  that  an  alternation  can  be  made,  as 
the  strands  being  even,  the  weaving  must  continue  the 
same,  unless  changed  in  this  way.  When  a  centre  of  6 
inches  in  diameter  has  been  finished  in  this  way,  divide 


the  spokes  into  "ones"  and  insert  an  odd  strand.     Con- 
tinue plain  weaving  until  mat  is  of  the  required  size. 

Border. — This  may  be  finished  according  to  taste.  The 
one  in  illustration  is  worked  according  to  Border  7  (Fig.  155). 
To  make  the  mats  the  desired  shape,  thoroughly  soak  them  in 
warm  water  and  turn  up  about  one  quarter  of  the  weaving. 
Press  firmly  into  position  and  secure  with  string  and  leave 
till  dry.  Then  thoroughly  varnish  inside  and  out,  and 
fasten  with  small  tacks  each  shell  to  the  stand.  Finish  off 
as  described  above. 


198  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

Note. — The  large  Japanese  umbrella  fire-screens  make  very 
good  foundations  for  the  same  in  cane-weaving.  Strip  off  the 
paper  and  begin  to  weave  where  the  ribs  join  the  under  portion. 
The  top  will  be  open,  and  the  weaving  can  be  varied  by  having 
coloured  ribbon,  string,  or  plait  introduced  at  intervals.  The 
umbrella  will  not  close,  but  makes  a  good  substantial  fire 
ornament. 


UPRIGHT   CIRCULAR  WEAVING 

The  children  having  become  proficient  in  flat  circular 
weaving  are  now  introduced  to  a  new  difficulty,  viz.  that  of 
upright  circular  weaving.  From  actual  experience  it  will 
be  found  more  profitable  in  the  end,  if  the  children  treat 
with  this  kind  of  weaving,  independently  of  the  flat. 

Upright  weaving  is  introduced  before  basket-making, 
because  it  presents  a  new  difficulty  to  the  child  and  yet  is 
not  so  troublesome  to  do  as  an  entire  basket  of  wicker. 
Any  shape  is  possible  to  get  where  the  bottom  is  provided. 
The  weaving  is  more  regular,  because  the  strands  are  fixed 
at  equal  distances,  and  there  is  no  skill  required  to  keep 
them  in  place. 

WASTE-PAPER  BASKET 

The  large  packets  of  brown  cardboard  circles  and  rims 
sold  for  stick  and  paper  weaving  are  very  useful  for  this 
work.  The  circles  are  already  punched  to  receive  sticks. 
These  baskets  if  made  with  sticks  are  not  worth  the 
trouble  bestowed  on  them,  because  immediately  the  basket 
is  used  the  bottom  falls  out  and  the  basket  becomes  useless. 
By  using  cane  instead  of  sticks  this  fault  is  avoided.  The 
largest  circle  which  measures  about  eight  inches  in  diameter 


UPRIGHT  CIRCULAR  WEAVING  199 

is  very  useful  for  making  a  waste -paper  basket.  The 
circles  are  nicely  stamped  with  a  central  pattern,  and  the 
edges  well  finished,  thus  giving  a  much  nicer  appearance 
than  if  the  circle  were  cut  by  hand.  The  cardboard  rim 
also  supplied  in  the  packets  is  of  service  to  hold  the  canes 
in  position  temporarily  until  a  portion  of  the  basket  is 
done,  and  the  strands  are  held  in  place  by  the  weaving. 
Two  ends  of  one  piece  of  cane  are  threaded  up  through 
two  adjoining  holes  which  securely  holds  the  bottom 
to  the  weaving.  The  holes  in  each  circle  are  even 
in  number,  so  one  hole  must  be  missed  or  another  made  . 
to  get  the  number  uneven,  which  is  necessary  for  the 
weaving  to  alternate  properly.  When  inserting  the  odd 
strand  splice  the  lower  end  and  wedge  it  up  through  the 
adjoining  hole  for  security. 

An  effective  way  of  weaving  is  by  taking  two  canes 
together  and  weaving  as  one.  It  is  necessary  to  keep 
them  untwisted  and  not  to  renew  two  new  lengths  at  the 
same  time.  Occasional  rows  of  straw  plait  introduced 
also  tend  to  improve  the  appearance  of  these  baskets. 
The  borders  are  finished  off  in  any  of  the  ways  shown  in 
Figs.  149-155. 


SHALLOW  BASKET  FOR  FLOWERS 

Cut  cardboard  circles  a  little  larger  than  a  tinned  tongue 
can,  and  with  a  red-hot  knitting  needle  or  punch  perforate 
tho  edge  with  an  uneven  number  of  holes  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  apart.  Cut  a  number  of  strands  of 
cane  12  inches  long,  bend  in  half  (but  do  not  crack  the  cane), 
and  pass  the  two  ends  through  two  separate  holes  side  by 
side.  Continue  round  the  circle  till  one  hole  is  left,  through 
this  pass  a  9-inch  length  of  cane  and  point  the  under  end 


200  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

and  wedge  tightly  into  the  adjoining  hole  with  the  next 
strand  of  cane.  The  article  is  now  ready  for  weaving,  and 
the  strands  being  uneven  and  at  equal  distances  apart,  the 
weaving  will  be  simple  and  regular  and  useful  when 
complete. 

Let  the  weaving  be  as  deep  as  the  tin  can  used.  Fasten 
off  the  ends  with  a  fancy  border  interlaced  two  or  three  apart. 
Wash  the  tin  can  thoroughly,  and  be  sure  to  procure  one 
which  has  been  evenly  cut  round  the  top.  Enamel  it 
inside  and  out,  also  the  cardboard  bottom  of  basket.  When 
dry,  place  the  can  inside  basket,  and  use  for  cut  flowers. 

If  the  cardboard  edge  protrudes  beyond  the  weaving,  it 
is  easily  hidden  by  a  three-plait  of  cane,  or  a  piece  of 
twisted  ribbon. 

Circles  of  any  size  may  be  cut,  and  baskets  either 
shallow  or  deep  can  be  made  in  this  way. 

DEEP  BASKET  FOR  TOBACCO  JAR 

This  basket  is  made  in  the  same  way,  and  the  can  used 
is  a  golden  syrup  can  with  cover.  The  weaving  is  done 
over  and  under  two  foundation  strands  throughout  and  not 
again  divided.  The  spokes  are  pushed  close  down  at  the 
top  instead  of  forming  a  border,  and  a  small  mat  woven  in 
same  manner  is  tied  on  to  form  the  cover.  The  whole  is 
enamelled,  tin  and  basket,  and  forms  a  useful  biscuit  or 
tobacco  jar. 

Square  and  triangular  shapes  may  also  be  woven  in  this 
manner,  but  to  maintain  the  outline  correctly  a  Kinder- 
garten stick  is  needed  at  the  corner  holes,  as  the  cane  is 
not  sufficiently  stiff,  to  keep  a  sharp  turn.  A  novel 
method  of  combining  flat  and  upright  weaving  is  shown 
in  the  wheelbarrow  and  mail  cart. 


UPRIGHT  CIRCULAR   WEA  VING  201 


SMALL  WHEELBARROW 

Materials  required. — 1.  Cardboard  for  foundation. 

2.  Cane  No.  1  for  foundation  rays. 

3.  Cane  No.  00  for  weaving. 

Method  of  Weaving. — Base. — Cut  a  cardboard  base  4 
inches  long,  3J  inches  wide  at  back,  narrowing  to  2J 
inches  at  front. 

Pierce  four  corner  holes  first  and  then  five  intermediate 


FIG.  165.— Small  Wheelbarrow. 

holes  down  the  sides,  four  across  the  back,  and  three  in  the 
front.  The  teacher  should  prepare  this  diagram  accurately 
and  mark  places  for  the  holes.  The  diagram  should  then 
be  reprinted  on  cards  5  inches  square,  and  each  child  be 
allowed  to  pierce  the  holes  with  a  coarse  pricker  and  then 
cut  out  the  shape. 

Cut  the  cane  into  lengths  of  7  inches,  soak  it  for  a  short 
time,  and  give  each  child  twelve  pieces. 

Double  each  length  in  half  and  thread  the  two  ends  up 
through  two  consecutive  holes.  Weave  thirty-four  rows 
until  the  weaving  measures  2  inches  in  depth.  After  the 
first  few  rows,  the  rays  must  be  pulled  slightly  outwards  to 
give  a  slope  to  the  sides. 


202  VARIED  0  CCU PA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VING 

Finish  off  the  "  rays  "  according  to  rule  given  for  No. 
3  border  (Fig.  151). 

The  Wheel. — This  consists  of  a  small  circular  mat  2J 
inches  in  diameter.  The  foundation  is  most  simple,  of 
four  strands  only,  made  according  to  Beginning  1.  The 
"rays"  of  wheel  are  woven  into  the  mat  according  to 
Border  7  (Fig.  155). 

Shafts  and  Legs. — Cut  two  lengths  of  No.  10  cane  for 
the  shafts  (8  inches  long),  and  two  lengths  3  inches  long 
for  the  legs.  These  must  be  pushed  up  through  the  corner 
holes  and  inserted  for  strength  into  the  weaving.  Kinder- 
garten sticks  will  answer  equally  as  well  as  the  coarse  cane 
for  shafts  and  legs. 

Varnish  the  cane  work  and  line  the  bottom  of  cart  with 
leather  paper. 

Attach  the  shafts  and  wheel  together  with  wire. 

Conversation  lesson  upon  wheelbarrow  should  follow. 

THE  MAIL  CART 

This  article  is  a  combination  of  flat  and  upright  circular 
weaving. 

Body  of  Cart. — Cut  an  oblong  of  stout  cardboard  or  very 
thin  wood  8x6  inches.  Pierce  holes  at  each  corner ;  these 
may  be  done  either  by  a  punch  or  red-hot  knitting  needle. 
Next  divide  the  spaces  between  the  corner  holes  into  equal 
distances  of  about  one  inch,  and  pierce  holes  at  each  division. 
On  one  of  the  four  sides  an  extra  hole  must  be  got  in  so  as 
to  get  an  uneven  number  of  holes  for  the  weaving  to  alter- 
nate properly,  therefore  choose  the  front  side  and  divide 
this  into  three-quarter  inches,  and  so  get  the  extra  hole. 
Weave  round  about  eight  rows  and  then  insert  at  each  corner 
hole  a  stout  cane  or  stick  which  is  needed  to  keep  the 


204 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


corners  firm  and  straight.  As  the  weaving  proceeds  pull 
it  gently  outwards  to  make  sloping  sides ;  when  the 
weaving  is  3J  indies  deep  finish  off  with  Border  3, 
but  so  vary  the  height  to  look  high  in  the  centre  of  each 
side  and  graduate  towards  the  corners.  The  border  in 
front  of  the  cart  should  be  pushed  down  nearly  flat. 
In  punching  the  holes  a  space  of  1 J  inches  might  be  left  in 
front  to  represent  the  footboard,  and  the  front  row  of 
holes  be  made  1  \  inches  from  the  edge. 


Fio.  167. 


The  Seat. — Cut  a  strip  of  cardboard  3  inches  wide  and  9 
inches  long  for  the  seat,  pierce  holes  in  the  exact  centre  f 
inch  apart,  leaving  a  space  each  side  to  form  the  back  and 
front  seat.  Cut  lengths  of  cane  7  inches  long,  double  in 
half,  and  thread  the  ends  up  through  two  adjoining  holes. 
Weave  backwards  and  forwards  for  a  few  rows  and  then 
insert  a  Kindergarten  stick  at  each  end  to  keep  the  side 
straight  and  firm.  When  about  two  inches  deep  finish 
with  Border  3.  Paste  a  strip  of  velveteen  or  plush  on 


UPRIGHT  CIRCULAR   WEA  VING  205 

each  cardboard  seat,  and  secure  the  sides  to  the  body  of 
cart  with  a  thread  of  fine  cane  or  wire. 

The  Wheels. — The  wheels  consist  of  two  round  mats  6 
inches  in  diameter,  the  foundation  for  which  is  of  No.  4 
cane,  and  the  weaving  is  done  with  No.  1.  The  wheels 
may  be  finished  off  flat,  or  with  a  border  according  to 
taste. 

The  Shafts. — Two  pieces  of  wood  12  inches  long  form  the 
shafts ;  these  are  enamelled  red  and  fastened  underneath 
the  cart  with  short  French  nails  and  wire. 

The  Axle. — Another  piece  of  wood  8  inches  long  and 
pointed  at  both  ends  is  fixed  across  the  cart  underneath  to 
form  the  axle.  Upon  the  pointed  ends  a  small  narrow 
reel  is  threaded,  and  to  this  reel  the  wheels  are  attached  by 
fine  tacks.  The  reel  allows  the  wheels  to  revolve  upon  the 
pointed  ends.  A  French  nail  is  fixed  outside  through 
the  point  as  a  linch  pin  to  prevent  the  wheel  from  slipping 
off. 

Finishing  Off. — The  cardboard  bottom,  axle,  and  shafts 
of  the  cart  are  all  enamelled  in  post-office  red,  and  the 
weaving  is  varnished  with  clear  copal  varnish  inside  and 
out. 

If  a  sixpenny  horse  be  attached  to  the  cart,  it  will 
greatly  please  the  children  and  form  a  novel  article  to 
show  to  visitors.  Every  part  can  be  done  by  a  boy  of 
seven  with  proper  instruction  and  superintendence.  The 
children  delight  in  making  something  different  to  mats  and 
baskets. 

The  inside  is  improved  by  lining  with  leather  paper  and 
adding  at  front  arid  back  two  knitted  mats  of  bits  of  wool 
or  cloth  made  by  the  children.  Dolls  also  might  be  dressed 
and  seated  in  to  make  the  thing  more  childlike  and 
realistic. 


206  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

LADY'S  SAILOR-HAT  WORK-BASKET 

Materials  required.— Eight  strands  of  No.  2  cane  20 
indies  long  for  the  foundation,  and  No.  1  cane  for  the 
weaving. 

Methods. — The  foundation  strands  are  arranged  accord- 
ing to  No.  3,  and  a  large  circular  mat,  as  described  on  p.  190, 


FIG.  168.— Lady's  Sailor-hat  Work-basket. 

is  woven  for  the  bottom  and  rim  of  the  hat.  This  circular 
mat  must  measure  10  inches  in  diameter  without  the 
border,  the  border  may  be  No.  3. 

Upright  Weaving. — The  principle  for  upright  weaving  is 
applied  here.  Take  ten  strands  of  cane  8  inches  long,  double 
in  half,  and  thread  up  the  ends  through  the  mat  at 
equal  distances  apart,  and  about  twenty  rows  in  from  the 
border.  See  that  the  loops  underneath  are  pulled  up  close 
and  fit  into  the  weaving  and  are  not  discernible  from  it. 
Start  with  a  weaving  thread  and  push  the  end  up  through 
the  weaving,  to  form  the  odd  strand.  Weave  round  closely 
to  the  mat,  until  the  sides  are  8  inches  deep.  Finish  off 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  207 

by   pushing   the   spokes  close  down    to    the    weaving,    as 
described  in  Border  3. 

The  crown  of  hat  is  made  of  a  circular  mat  8  inches 
diameter,  finished  off  with  the  same  tight  border.  The  crown 
is  attached  by  a  thread  of  cane  to  the  other  portion  for  about 
one  inch,  and  the  remainder  opens  and  shuts  as  a  cover. 
The  inside  and  cover  are  nicely  lined  with  a  full  lining  of 
silk  and  closed  with  bow  and  ends  of  ribbon.  A  broad 
band  of  satin  ribbon  finishes  the  outside  to  simulate  a 
"lady's  sailor  hat." 

COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING 

If  the  children  have  made  flat  articles  and  upright  ones 
with  cardboard  or  wooden  bottoms,  there  will  be  little 
difficulty  in  introducing  them  to  basket-making. 

The  round  shallow  basket  is  the  best  for  beginners  to 
learn  upon,  because  it  includes  the  principal  difficulties, 
and  being  a  small  article  is  easily  handled  and  soon  finished. 

The  difficult  parts  of  basket-weaving  are  :  the  beginning 
and  the  border.  Most  of  the  weaving  is  plain  sailing  after 
the  division  of  the  rays  is  correctly  made.  Though  not 
really  difficult  to  do  when  shown,  basket-weaving  may 
appear  to  the  uninitiated  rather  puzzling  on  paper.  The 
teacher  should  be  provided  with  a  good  sharp  knife  to 
point  and  cut  the  cane,  which  must  be  well  soaked  for  an 
hour  before  use.  For  this  reason  it  is  not  a  desirable 
occupation  in  cold  weather,  because  of  the  chapped  hands 
one  is  liable  to  get  from  having  them  constantly  wet. 

When  making  a  basket  it  is  often  necessary  to  plunge 
the  whole  into  water,  so  as  to  regulate  the  shape  and  keep 
the  cane  from  getting  too  dry.  The  teacher  should  have 
at  hand  a  pail  of  water  for  this  purpose. 


208 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


There  are  two  ways  of  weaving,  either  with  one  or  two 
strands  of  cane  at  one  time.  The  first  is  the  most  simple 
and  is  worked  "out"  and  "in,"  or  "above"  and  "below," 
until  the  basket  is  finished.  The  other  way  is  to  take  two 
weaving  strands  and  begin  by  inserting  both  in  the  weaving, 
and  then  keep  one  outside  and  the  other  inside  of  each 
foundation  ray.  Cross  the  outer  length  over  the  inner, 


FIG.  169.— Cotton  Basket. 

between  each  foundation  ray  or  pair,  and  continue  in  this 
way  round  and  round  until  the  top  of  the  basket  is  reached. 
For  young  children  the  single  weaving  is  best ;  but  a  row 
of  the  double  at  the  bottom  of  a  basket  gives  additional 
strength  to  the  sides. 

In  joining  on  a  new  strand  it  is  best  to  push  the  end 
back  side  by  side  with  the  old  end.  Keep  the  uprights  at 
equal  distances  from  each  other  and  pull  them  in  position 
as  they  require  it. 

A  pleasing  variety  to  the  work  is  to  let  children  weave 
a  length  of  coloured  Macrame  string  with  the  cane.  The 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  209 

two  must  be  woven  together  and  the  string  kept  above,  or 
beloiv  the  cane  throughout.  Very  pretty  fancy  baskets 
may  be  made  in  this  way.  A  ball  of  string  to  use  from  is 
necessary,  as  joins  are  unsightly. 

An  all  string  basket  is  not  so  good  as  one  of  cane  and 
string  combined.  The  cane  imparts  firmness,  whilst  the 
string  adds  beauty,  and  therefore  the  two  together  look  best. 
There  is  scarcely  any  limit  to  the  various  shapes  which 
may  be  made.  Some  of  these  require  a  little  thought  to 
be  successful,  e.g.  a  true  horn  shape  can  only  be  got  by 
introducing  from  time  to  time  short  lengths  at  the  curved 
portion,  because  this  part  needs  many  more  strands  to  fill 
it  than  the  upper  curve,  and  if  the  weaving  be  done 
equally  the  bold  horn  shape  cannot  be  obtained.  A  large 
round  mat  may  be  pressed  upwards  on  four  sides  and  tied 
till  dry.  It  will  then  do  as  a  flat  work-basket,  with  four 
corner  pockets. 

SHALLOW  BASKET  (THIMBLE) 

Material  required. — No.  1  cane. 

Method. — Cut  eight  strands  of  No.  1  cane  12  inches 
long  and  begin  as  described  in  No.  2.  Weave  a  circle  (two 
over  and  two  under)  3  inches  in  diameter  for  the  bottom. 
Turn  up  the  sides  and  weave  to  a  depth  of  2  inches. 
Finish  with  Border  No.  3,  behind  one  and  down  side  of 
second.  Varnish  inside  and  out.  These  little  baskets  are 
useful  for  school  use  to  hold  the  thimbles  used  in  class. 

COTTON  BASKET 

Material  required.— No.  1  cane. 

Method. — Cut  eight  strands  of  cane  20  inches  long  and 
begin  according  to  No.  3.  Weave  a  circle  for  twenty  rounds, 


210  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

two  over  and  two  under,  then  subdivide  into  "ones,"  and 
continue  the  circle  until  it  measures  5  inches  in  diameter. 

Sides. — Turn  up  the  rays  and  weave  the  sides  to  the 
depth  of  3  inches,  exclusive  of  the  border.  The  upper 
rounds  may  be  gradually  tightened  to  give  a  more  artistic 
shape,  or  spread  out  flower-pot  shape. 

Border  No.  3. — Over  the  first,  under  the  second,  down 
by  the  side'  of  the  third.  Useful  for  cotton  or  thimbles. 

DOLL'S  FISH-BASKET 

Materials  required.— 1.  Cane  No.  0  for  weaving. 

2.  Cane  No.  00  for  foundation. 

Method. — Take  eight  strands  of  cane  10  inches  long 
and  begin  as  in  No.  2.  Weave  a  small  circle  of  1J 
inches  for  the  bottom,  keeping  the  rays  in  pairs  through- 
out. Turn  up  for  the  sides  and  weave  to  a  depth  of  2 
inches,  gradually  widening  the  distance  between  the  rays 
until  the  basket  measures  3  inches  across  the  top. 

Border. — Take  each  pair  of  rays  and  push  close  down  by 
the  side  "of  the  next  pair,  as  in  Border  2.  Leave  one 
pair  raised  1J  inches  to  form  a  loop,  and  twist  this  pair 
before  pushing  the  ends  into  the  weaving.  This  loop 
represents  the  handle.  A  French  fish  -  wife  might  be 
dressed  in  class  and  one  of  these  baskets  attached  to  her 
back,  to  give  children  an  idea  of  its  use.  Little  baskets 
with  two  handles  might  be  made  in  a  similar  way,  and  filled 
as  hampers  of  sweets,  etc. 

SMALL  CARD-BASKET 

Materials  required. — 1.  No.  4  cane  for  foundations. 
2.  No.  1  cane  for  weaving. 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  211 

Method  of  Lesson. — Cut  eight  lengths  of  No.  4  cane 
26  inches  long  and  cross  them  and  begin  as  in  Fig.  140. 
Weave  for  the  bottom  a  small  round  mat  4  inches  in 
diameter.  Slightly  cut  the  foundation  rays  and  turn  up 
for  the  sides.  Continue  weaving  one  over,  one  under,  for 
a  depth  of  2  inches,  keeping  the  weaving  nearly  upright. 
Push  the  end  into  the  weaving  to  finish. 


FIG.  170.— Small  Card-basket. 

Border.  —  Most  of  this  basket  consists  of  the  border 
which  is  woven  both  top  and  bottom. 

Top  Border. — Take  a  ray  which  measures  about  ten  inches 
and  pass  it  behind  the  next  ray  and  over  the  second  and 
down  by  the  side  of  the  third.  Take  the  ray  next  to  it 
and  do  the  same,  that  is  : — Pass  behind,  out  and  over,  in 
and  down  by  the  side.  Each  ray  is  pushed  down  through 
the  whole  of  the  side  weaving,  until  it  protrudes  1 J  inches 
at  the  bottom. 

Lower  Border. — Turn  the  basket  upside  down  and  curve 
each  end  into  a  semicircle.  Take  one  end,  pass  it  to  the 
left,  behind  the  next,  and  down  by  the  side  of  the  second 


212 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


from  it.  Continue  the  same  method  with  each  one,  and 
the  result  will  be  an  open  foot-stand  for  the  basket  to  rest 
upon.  The  upper  border  is  interlaced  with  a  piece  of 
wide  satin  ribbon  tied  in  a  bow,  and  the  well  of  basket  is 
lined  with  gathered  silk  of  the  same  shade.  This  little 
article  is  useful  for  table  use  either  for  cards  or  cottons. 


FIG.  171.— Doll's  Sailor  Hat  Fern-stand. 


DOLL'S  SAILOR  HAT 
Materials  required. — 1.  Cane  No.  1  for  foundation. 

2.  Cane  No.  00  for  weaving. 

3.  Three  Kindergarten  sticks. 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  213 

Method  of  Lesson. — Take  four  lengths  of  cane  6 
inches  long  and  begin  as  in  No.  1.  Weave  two  over 
and  two  under  until  the  crown  is  \\  inches  in  diameter. 
Turn  up  the  rays,  keeping  them  perfectly  straight  up 
and  in  pairs  until  the  sides  are  done.  Weave  to  a  depth 
of  1  inch  for  the  sides  and  then  turn  out  the  rays  for  the 
brim.  This  part  may  be  done  flat  on  the  desk  and  treated 
in  the  same  way  as  a  circular  mat.  Let  the  rim  measure 
about  one  inch  in  width,  and  then  finish  off  with  a  close 
border,  as  described  in  Border  7.  Varnish  the  hat  inside 


9  FIG.  172.— Turned-up  Doll's  Hat. 

and  out,  and  be  careful  to  notice  when  turning  up  the  rays 
for  the  sides  that  the  neatest  side  of  the  beginning  goes 
outside  for  the  top  of  the  crown.  These  little  hats  may  be 
made  sufficiently  large  to  hold  a  small  fern-pot  similar  in 
design  to  the  miniature  fern-stand  in  Fig.  171.  Three 
Kindergarten  sticks  are  used  in  this  case  for  the  tripod,  but 
small  canes  could  be  substituted  for  one  of  larger  size. 

TURNED-UP  DOLL'S  HAT 

Material  required. — No.  00  cane. 
Method. — Cut  eight  lengths  8  inches  long  and  inter- 
lace two  pairs  into  two  pairs,  as  shown  in  No.  5.     Leave 


214  VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 

an  odd  strand  and  weave  a  small  circle  of  1 J  inches  diameter 
for  the  crown.  Separate  the  pairs  of  rays  into  "  ones,"  and 
continue  till  the  crown  is  2J  inches  in  diameter.  Turn  up 
the  rays  for  side  and  keep  these  gradually  sloping  out- 
wards. Let  the  sides  measure  about  1 J  inches  deep  before 
making  the  brim. 

Brim.  —  For  the  brim  place  hat  on  desk  with  crown 
uppermost  and  bend  out  the  rays  for  brim.  If  both  sides 
of  hat  are  to  be  turned  up,  gently  bend  the  rays  on  each 
side  back  towards  the  crown,  but  do  it  on  one  side  only 
for  the  hat  in  Fig.  172.  Weave  on  round  the  brim  like 
a  flat  mat  either  on  the  desk  or  in  the  hand,  whichever  is 
easier,  and  make  a  good  brim  of  2  inches  wide. 

Border. — The  border  may  be  open  or  close  as  desired. 
Soak  the  hat  in  warm  water  and  press  into  a  good  shape 
and  leave  to  dry.  Varnish  or  enamel  when  dry  and  trim 
with  ribbons  or  cord  and  tassels. 

HAMPER  OR  TUMBLER  CASE 

This  is  a  very  simple  and  useful  little  article.  Only  four 
strands  are  required  for  the  foundation,  and  these  must  be 
12  inches  long.  Cross  two  over  two  and  begin  as  in 
Beginning  1.  Weave  eight  rows,  two  over  and  two  under, 
and  then  divide  into  ones ;  weave  a  circle  of  2  inches 
diameter  for  the  bottom,  then  turn  up  and  weave  the  sides 
3  inches  deep,  gradually  widening  till  the  top  circle 
measures  3  inches.  Finish  by  pushing  the  spokes  close 
down  to  the  bottom  of  the  sides,  thus  forming  a  foundation 
of  double  strands.  There  is  no  border,  but  each  spoke  is 
pushed  down  close  by  the  side  of  the  next. 

The  Cover. — For  the  cover  begin  as  before  with  four 
foundation  strands  and  weave  exactly  another  circle  like 
the  bottom  of  the  basket,  only  of  3  inches  diameter 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  215 

instead  of  two.     The  border  of  the  cover  is  finished  in  the 
same  way  as  the  case. 


FIG.  173.— Hamper  or  Tumbler  Case. 


216 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


Use. — Place  a  small  claret  tumbler  inside,  and  this  little 
article  will  then  be  useful  for  travelling  purposes,  or  fill  the 
case  with  fancy  sweets  or  chocolate  and  tie  the  outside  with 
cross  ribbons  and  bows,  and  it  then  becomes  a  pretty  present 
for  a  child  or  article  for  a  bazaar. 


The  art  pot  is  8  inches  high  from  the  base  to  "the  border, 
and  23  inches  round  at  its  widest  part,  narrowing  to  20  inches 
at  the  top. 

The  foundation  consists  of  8  strands  of  No.  4  cane  #<£  inches 
long.  The  beginning  is  made  according  to  "No.  2  ";  about 
ten  rows  are  woven,  two  over  and  two  under,  and  then  sub- 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  217 

divided  into  "ones";  the  bottom  measures  3J  inches  in 
diameter,  after  which  the  strands  slope  gently  outwards  till 
the  sides  are  4  inches  deep  and  23  inches  in  circumference. 
At  this  point  three  lengths  of  narrow  straw  plait,  crimson 
and  cream,  are  interwoven,  and  very  much  improve  the 
appearance  of  the  pot.  The  cane-weaving  is  continued  for 
nearly  two  inches,  and  the  foundation  spokes  are  drawn 
gradually  closer  until  the  circumference  measures  20  inches. 
The  border  is  finished  off  according  to  "Border  4,"  over 
three  and  down  by  the  side  of  the  fourth. 

The  small  art  pots  or  an  ordinary  flower-pot  will  fit 
inside  and  the  article  is  useful  for  indoor  plants. 

OVAL  HAND-BASKET 

Materials  required.— 1.  No.  3  cane  for  foundation 
strands. 

2.  No.  1  cane  for  weaving. 

Method  Of  Lesson. — Make  an  oval  9  inches  long  and 
4J  inches  wide  according  to  directions  given  for  oval 
dinner-mat.  Wind  in  this  case  eight  times  round  a  piece  of 
wood  16  inches  long,  and  interlace  six  strands  about 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  apart.  The  strands  must  measure 
when  cut  32  inches,  as  they  form  the  foundation  strands  of 
the  long  way  of  the  basket.  The  cross  strands  must 
measure  30  inches  in  length,  and  these  form  the  foundation 
rays  of  the  sides  of  the  basket.  When  the  oval  for  bottom 
is  of  the  required  size,  slightly  cut  with  penknife  all  the 
foundation  rays  so  that  they  turn  up  easily.  Now  take 
two  weaving  strands,  push  the  ends  into  the  wicker  and 
begin  to  weave  with  both,  one  to  go  inside  and  the  other 
outside  of  each  ray,  cross  them  each  time  and  repeat  all 
round  until  both  threads  are  used  up.  This  mode  of  weav- 


218 


VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  WEAVING 


ing  is  the  one  generally  used  by  basket-makers.  In  this 
instance  it  is  introduced  to  give  a  firmness  and  uprightness 
to  the  side  strands  of  basket.  The  sides  of  the  basket  are 
woven  two  rows  alike  and  then  alternated.  Weave  in  this 
manner  until  the  basket  is  5  inches  deep,  then  finish  the 


FIG,  175.— Oval  Hand-basket. 

top  rows  in  the  same  way  as  the  lower  ones — that  is,  with 
two  weaving  threads,  one  outside  and  inside,  cross  and 
repeat.  To  give  additional  strength  to  the  sides  an  extra 
spoke  is  added  to  the  side  of  each  foundation  ray,  so  that 
all  the  rays  are  doubled. 

Border. — Take  a  pair  of  rays,  pass  them  to  the  left  behind 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  219 

the  next  two  pairs  and  down  by  the  side  of  the  third. 
Take  next  pair  and  proceed  in  the  same  way  and  continue 
till  the  whole  border  is  finished  (see  No.  5). 

Handle. — Nine  lengths  of  No.  4  cane  27  inches  long  are 
required  for  the  handle.  Take  three  at  a  time  and  push 
down  into  the  weaving  by  the  side  of  three  adjoining  pairs 
of  rays.  They  should  reach  well  to  the  bottom  of  basket. 
Take  each  set  of  three  rays  and  plait  the  nine  in  the 
ordinary  plait  of  three.  Leave  4  inches  unplaited  and 
insert  these  ends  into  the  opposite  side  to  correspond  with 
the  other.  The  handle  may  be  secured  still  further  with 
wire,  but  if  used  for  light  articles  there  will  be  no  need  of 
this,  as  the  varnish  acts  like  glue  and  makes  the  whole  firm 
and  strong.  Varnish  thoroughly  inside  and  out. 

FERN-STAND  FOR  TABLE 

Materials  required.— 1.  Two  bamboo  canes  |d.  each. 

2.  Fine  cane  No.  1  for  weaving. 

3.  Medium  cane  No.  4  for  foundation. 

Plan  of  Teaching".— The  three  flower-pots  at  the  base 
of  the  stand  are  of  the  same  size,  as  also  are  the  three  fern 
vases  at  the  top. 

1.  FERN  VASES 

Take  eight  strands  of  fine  cane  about  twenty-four  inches 
long.  Lay  them  in  position  four  across  four  and  make  a 
beginning  according  to  Rule  2.  When  four  rows  have  been 
woven  and  the  centre  tightly  secured,  turn  up  the  spokes 
at  once  and  weave  over  two  and  under  two  for  sixty  rounds 
or  to  a  depth  of  4  inches,  gradually  widening  the  foundation 
strands  as  the  weaving  proceeds.  This  widening  conies 
naturally,  and  it  is  one  of  the  difficulties  to  be  over- 
come, if  the  article  requires  perfectly  straight  sides.  The 


Fio.  1V6.— Fern-stand,  for  Table. 


COMBINED  CANE-WEAVING  „  221 

spokes  are  now  subdivided  into  "  ones  "  and  the  weaving 
continued  for  another  4  inches,  still  increasing  the  width 
until  the  circumference  measures  about  twenty-six,  inches. 
Cut  the  spokes  of  equal  length  and  finish  with  Border  No.  3. 

2.  FLOWER-POT 

The  foundations  of  the  pots  are  made  of  No.  4  cane, 
because  the  upright  sides  need  a  firm  support  to  keep  them 
straight.  For  the  foundation  take  eight  strands  18  inches 
long  and  make  beginning  according  to  No.  2.  Weave  a 
circle,  two  over  and  two  under,  of  3  inches  diameter  for 
the  bottom,  turn  up  the  spokes,  weave  eight  rows  and  then 
divide  into  "  ones,"  continue  weaving  till  the  sides  measure 
5  inches  deep,  and  then  finish  the  rays  with  Border  No.  3. 

3.  THE  TRIPOD  STAND 

Take  two  bamboo  canes  and  cut  three  lengths  of  20 
inches  and  three  more  lengths  of  11  inches.  Fasten  the  long 
lengths  together  about  five  inches  from  the  end  and  wind 
round  and  round  with  fine  cane.  Tie  the  three  shorter 
lengths  into  a  triangular  shape  and  fasten  the  ends  of  the 
long  pieces  into  the  outer  angles,  wind  round  with  cane,  and 
finish  off  by  crossing  all  the  tripod  with  twists  of  fine  cane. 
Tie  the  three  vases  together  and  fasten  to  the  tripod  with 
a  thread  of  fine  cane,  as  shown  in  Fig.  176. 

The  stand  is  suitable  for  the  centre  of  a  table — the  lower 
part  might  be  filled  with  ferns  in  pots,  and  the  upper 
portion  with  tins  of  cut  flowers  or  grasses.  Varnish  the 
whole  inside  and  out. 

FERN  VASE  WITH  STAND 

This  vase  is  made  similar  to  the  others.  It  is  a  little 
larger,  with  deeper  well,  and  in  addition  has  a  foot-stand 


FIG.  177.— Fern  Vase  with  Stand. 


COMBINED  CANE-  WE  A  V1NG 


223 


added,  so  that  it  could  be  adapted  for  hanging  or  standing 
purposes. 

Make  the  vase  exactly  as  before  described,  with  longer 
foundation  strands,  and  plunge  it  occasionally  into  water  to 
regulate  the  shape.  When  finished  tie  the  circular  top  in 
position  and  leave  in  water  till  thoroughly  wet,  and  allow 


Fio.  178. — Vase  for  Flowers. 

string  to  remain  until  the  cane  work  has  dried,  when  the 
shape  will  remain  unaltered. 

The  Foot. — Cut  lengths  of  cane  of  6  inches  and  insert  one 
at  each  ray  of  the  apex,  to  run  by  the  side  of  the  foundation 
strands.  First  insert  a  knitting  needle  and  push  the  short 
lengths  in  its  place.  Spread  out  these  strands  nearly  flat 
on  a  table  or  desk  and  begin  to  weave  round  them  just  in 


224  VARIED  OCCUPA  TIONS  IN  WE  A  VING 

the  same  way  as  a  small  mat.  Turn  the  vase  upside  down 
to  finish,  and  widen  the  spokes  as  the  weaving  proceeds. 
Weave  about  two  inches,  and  finish  off  with  a  fancy  or  plain 
border,  whichever  is  desired. 

VASE  FOR  FLOWERS 

These  fern  vases  are  easily  made  by  the  children,  and 
there  are  many  ways  of  using  them ;  some  may  be  used 
singly  as  a  receptacle  for  flowers  or  grasses.  First  procure 
a  small  tin  spice  canister,  enamel  it  inside  and  out  to  keep 
it  from  rust,  and  then  place  it  in  the  well  part  of  the  fern 
vase  and  fill  with  flowers,  as  in  Fig.  178.  Others  look  well 
mounted.  Cut  very  stout  cardboard  or  thin  wood  into 
an  artistic  shape,  such  as  a  diamond,  heart,  or  shield  shape, 
then  fix  in  position  two  or  more  fern  vases,  ornament  with 
bows  of  ribbon,  fill  with  coloured  artificial  grasses,  and  the 
result  will  be  a  very  pleasing  and  useful  article  for  wall 
decoration. 


THE  END 


Printe.lby  R.  £  R.  CLARK,  LIMITKD,  Edinburgh, 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR. 

VARIED  OCCUPATIONS  IN  STRING  WORK, 
COMPRISING  KNOTTING,  NETTING,  LOOPING, 
PLAITING,  AND  MACRAME.  By^LouiSA  WALKER. 
35.  6d. 

EDUCATIONAL  NEWS.— "The  treatment  of  the  subject  is 
deserving  of  special  praise,  and  teachers  will  find  in  this  book  much 
valuable  information,  and  very  clear  and  concise  explanations  of  how 
such  work  may  be  accomplished.  We  heartily  commend  the  book  to 
teachers  in  search  of  a  text-book  on  'this  increasingly  interesting 
subject." 

TEACHERS'  AID. — "  Teachers  desiring  a  practical  knowledge  of 
this  subject  will  find  Mrs.  Walker's  book  all  that  they  can  desire.  The 
illustrations  are  numerous  and  excellent,  the  directions  simple  and 
clearly  expressed,  and  the  aim  and  object  of  the  training  fully  explained. 
.  .  .  We  very  strongly  commend  it." 


WORKS   BY 
ELIZABETH    ROSEVEAR, 

Senior  Teacher  and  Lecturer  on  Needlework  at  the  Training  College, 
Stockwell,  London. 

A  TEXT-BOOK  OF  NEEDLEWORK,  KNITTING, 
AND  CUTTING-OUT,  with  Methods  of  Teaching.  By 
ELIZABETH  ROSEVEAR.  With  Original  Illustrations  and 
Sectional  Diagrams.  Second  Edition.  Revised  and  En- 
larged. Crown  8vo.  6s. 

NEEDLEWORK,  KNITTING,  AND  CUTTING-OUT, 
for  Older  Girls.  By  ELIZABETH  ROSEVEAR.  With 
Original  Illustrations  and  Sectional  Diagrams.  Globe  8vo. 
STANDARD  IV.,  6d.  STANDARD  V.,  8d.  STANDARDS  VI., 
VII.,  andEx-VIL,  is. 

NEEDLEWORK:  A  Manual  of  Needlework,  Knitting,  and 
Cutting- Out,  for  Evening  Continuation  Schools.  By 
ELIZABETH  ROSEVEAR.  With  Original  Illustrations  and 
Sectional  Diagrams.  Globe  8vo.  2s. 

MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  LTD.,  LONDON. 


MANUAL   INSTRUCTION. 

MANUAL  TRAINING:  WOODWORK 

BY 

GEORGE  RICKS,  B.Sc.  (Lond.) 

Inspector  of  Schools,  School  Board  for  London. 
Demy  410.     75.  6d. 

NATURE. — "  Used  with  care,  this  manual  work  becomes  a 
valuable  educational  agent.  ...  Mr.  Ricks  has  kept  the  true  aims  of 
manual  training  well  in  mind  in  the  preparation  of  his  work.  .  .  . 
The  author's  experience  has  enabled  him  to  develop  a  practicable  scheme 
of  work  in  which  it  is  shown  how  they  can  be  carried  into  effect. 
Beginning  with  a  chapter  on  drawing  as  a  factor  in  manual  training  in 
wood,  this  is  shown  to  be  the  fundamental  basis  of  the  work.  The 
necessity  of  exact  measurement  in  all  work,  and  the  use  of  working 
drawings,  is  insisted  upon  ;  and  rightly,  for  without  drawings  to  scale, 
exact  and  intelligent  handiwork  is  scarcely  possible.  An  instructive 
chapter  is  given  on  the  various  woods  used  as  timber,  their  structure, 
growth,  preparation,  and  properties.  .  .  .  After  the  preliminary 
chapters  and  exercises  come  systematic  work  on  the  use  of  carpenters' 
cutting  tools,  simple  workshop  operations,  and  bench  work  from  work- 
ing drawings.  The  book  shows  evidence  of  thought  and  experience, 
and  should  prove  of  service  to  teachers  of  manual  training." 

THE    GRAMMAR    OF    WOOD-WORK. 

A  Graduated  System  of  Manual  Training  for  Elementary, 
Secondary,  and  Technical  Schools.  By  WALTER  E. 
DEGERDON.  With  a  Preface  by  H.  LLEWELLYN  SMITH. 
4to.  3s.  ;  sewed,  2s. 


DOMESTIC    ECONOMY. 

A  PRIMER  OF  DOMESTIC  ECONOMY.  By  E.  A. 
BARNETT  and  H.  C.  O'NEILL.  Pott  8vo.  is. 

SA  TURD  A  Y  REVIEW.— "A.  capital  little  book  for  the  young  householder.  .  .  . 
It  is  the  excellent  merit  of  this  handbook  that  its  teaching  takes  a  most  practical 
form,  and  is  strictly  elementary.  It  lays  down  a  sure  foundation  of  first  principles 
for  the  use  of  the  beginner,  and  altogether  we  do  not  know  a  better  little  book  on  a 
great  subject  than  this." 

GLASGOW  HERALD. — "  It  is  exceptionally  well  planned,  and  the  information 
about  house-building,  drainage,  food  and  clothing,  cooking,  heating,  nursing,  and 
the  common  economies  of  daily  life  is  both  valuable  and  well  arranged." 

HOUSEHOLD  MANAGEMENT  AND  COOKERY.  By 
W.  B.  TEGETMEIER.  Pott  8vo.  is. 

PALL  MALL  GAZETTE.—"  A  sensible  and  thoroughly  practical  manual.  .  .  . 
It  can  be  consulted  readily,  and  the  information  it  contains  is  given  in  the  simplest 
language." 

EDUCA  TIONAL  TIMES.—"  This  sort  of  book,  which  has  long  been  wanted, 
ought  not  to  be  confined  to  Board  Schools.  .  .  .  By  its  careful  study  a  girl  can  be 
educated,  not  only  to  become  a  valuable  servant,  but  also  a  good  and  sensible 

MIDDLE-CLASS  COOKERY  BOOK.  Compiled  and  Edited 
for  the  Manchester  School  of  Domestic  Economy  and  Cookery. 
Pott  8vo.  is.  6d. 

EDUCA  TIONAL  NEWS.—"  A  little  book  capable  of  imparting  a  great  amount 
of  instruction  in  regard  to  the  practical  art  of  cookery.  Its  directions  are  clear 
and  precise  ;  and  it  aims  at  no  dishes  but  such  as  may  be  prepared  from  the  ordinary 
materials  employed  in  the  kitchens  of  middle-class  people." 

MANCHESTER  GUARDIAN.— "This  is  a  very  excellent  little  book  of  its 
kind,  and  it  is  only  a  pity  that  it  is  anonymous." 

SCHOOL  GUAR  DIA  N. — "  We  can  heartily  commend  the  Middle-Class  Cookery 
Book  as  an  admirable  little  volume  upon  a  subject  of  general  interest." 

SCHOOLMASTER.—"  It  is  a  laudable  object  to  enable  girls  who  are  learning 
to  cook  to  prepare  a  few  inexpensive  delicacies  as  well  as  cheap  dishes." 

THE   SCHOOL    COOKERY   BOOK.     By   Miss   GUTHRIE 

WRIGHT.     Pott  8vo.     is. 
SIMPLE    LESSONS    IN    COOKERY.      For    the    Use   of 

Teachers    of    Elementary  and    Technical    Classes.       By    MARY 

HARRISON.     Globe  8vo.     Sewed,     is.  6d. 
THE  SCHOOL  COOKERY  BOOK.    For  Use  in  Elementary 

Schools  and  Technical  Classes.     By  MARY   HARRISON.     Globe 

8vo.     Sewed.     6d. 
DRESSMAKING.      A  Technical  Manual  for  Teachers.     By 

Mrs.  HENRY  GRENFELL.     Pott  8vo.     is. 

PRINCESS. — "  It  is  a  thoroughly  practical  little  work,  and  contains  information 
on  all  points  relating  to  dressmaking.  It  is  also  embellished  with  numerous  diagrams, 
which  considerably  enhance  its  value  as  a  technical  manual." 

PRACTICAL  DRESSMAKING.  For  Students  and  Technical 
Classes.  By  Mrs.  J.  BROUGHTON,  late  Principal  of  the  Needlework 
Department,  National  Training  School  of  Cookery,  Buckingham 
Palace  Road,  London.  Globe  8vo.  2s.  6d. 

CUTTING-OUT  AND  DRESSMAKING.  From  the  French 
of  Mdlle.  E.  GRAND'HOMME.  With  numerous  diagrams.  Pott 
8vo.  is. 

MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  LTD.,  LONDON. 


MACMILLAN   AND   CO.'S    PUBLICATIONS. 

MACMILLAN'S  "OFFICIAL"  DRAWING  BOOKS. 
Nos.  I. -XX.    Price  Threepence  each. 

BLACKBOARD  DRAWING. 

By  M.  SWANNELL.     Royal  410.     4s.  6d. 

THE  FIRST  ELEMENTS  OF  SCIENCE  ARRANGED  AS  OBSERVATION 
LESSONS,  AND  CORRELATED  WITH  DRAWING. 

By  GEORGE  RICKS,  B.Sc.     Illustrated  by  ARTHUR  WILKINSON. 
In  three  parts.    Medium  410.    Is.  6d.  each. 

A  GRADUATED  COURSE  OF  DRAWING  FOR  INFANTS. 

By  CONSTANCE  H.  FOWLER.     Royal  410.    4s.  6d. 

MACMILLAN'S  ART  STUDIES  OF  ANIMALS,  PLANTS,  COMMON 
OBJECTS  AND  CONVENTIONAL  FORMS. 

8vo.     Sewed.     6d. 

MACMILLAN'S  BRUSH  WORK  COPY  BOOKS. 

A  Graduated  Scheme  of  Lessons  Designed  and  Arranged  by  A.  R.  CAR TWRIGHT  and 
F.  C.  PROCTOR.    Nos.  I.  to  IV.    4d.  each.    Nos.  V.  and  VI.    5d.  each. 

MACMILLAN'S  "OFFICIAL"  COPY  BOOKS. 
Nos.  I. -XIII.    Price  2d.  each. 

MACMILLAN'S  "OFFICIAL"  WRITING  CHARTS. 

Size,  32  by  21  in.,  on  Cloth,  Rollers,  and  Varnished. 
No.  I.— Small  Letters.     No.  II.—  SmalPLetters,  Difficult  Joinings.     No.  III.— Capital 

Letters.     No.  IV. — Capitals  and  Joinings.     Price  2s.  6d.  each. 

TEACHERS'  AID. — "  If  good  writers  are  not  produced  by  the  use  of  these  excellent 
Copy  Books,  it  will  not  be  the  fault  of  the  series." 

WORD-BUILDING  AND  COMPOSITION. 

By  ROBERT  S.  WOOD. 


Book  I.  ...  2d. 
Book  II.  ...  2d. 
Book  III.  .  .  .3d. 
Book  IV.  ...  3d. 
Complete  in  1  vol.  Sewed,  Is. 


Book    V.  .  6d. 

Book   VI.        .  .    6d. 

Book  VII.         .       .       .is. 

Complete  in  1  vol.    Sewed,  2s. 


SIX  LARGE  CHARTS  IN  COLOURS  FOR  THE  CLASS  TEACHING  OF 
COMPOSITION. 

(1)  Sentence  Structure  and  Anatomy  (Diagram) — Synoptic  and  Analytic. 

(2)  A  Writer's  Guide  and  Danger  Signal  Code  in  marking  Exercises. 

(3)  Common  Faults  in  Composition— Their  effectual  Criticism  and  Prevention. 

(4)  How  to  orally  describe  Common  Objects  for  Juniors. 

(5)  Letter- Writing  Guide — General  and  Commercial  Correspondence. 

(6)  Use  of  Capitals,  Stops,  and  Marks  in  Writing. 

Price  3s.  each,  Mounted  and  Varnished.    The  Six  on  Roller  to  turn  over,  13s. 
E.  J.  ARNOLD  AND  SON,  PUBLISHERS,  LEEDS. 

MACMILLAN  &  CO.,  LTD.,  ST.  MARTIN'S  ST.,  LONDON,  W.C. 


NIVE^SITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
\  ERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


LD  21-100m-9,'47(A5702sl6)476 


WY 


351)00 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


